Home

TA100 Pro Manual - 4.01b

1. Figure 190 Auto Process Schedule Details Setting Definition Description Enter a description for this AutoProcess Schedule Examples Poll California Clock Run Payroll Reports etc January 2009 Time America Inc 241 TA100 Pro Manual Run a File Poll Clocks Run Reports Reindex Items List Time Day of the Week O January 2009 Time America Inc Select this option to schedule an Event that will launch any sort of executable program An example of this might be a Batch file that zips up your data files and copies them to a safe location on your network With this option selected you must enter the path to the desired file Select this option to schedule an event that will poll the transactions from any or all of your time clocks This Event can also perform any of the other normal time clock polling options You must be sure to tag all the time clocks you want to poll by either double clicking on them or selecting the tag all button You must also select at least one polling option by clicking the Poll Options button Select this option to schedule an Event that will automatically run any of several reports such as Missing Punches or Hours You may notice that the list of available reports is greatly abridged and that none of the Payroll Exports are available Time Card data should be thoroughly reviewed before running any Payroll Export Each report to be run must be tagged
2. Number C Name Saree SESE FF leben Ire Reprocess Add Trans EdivaddStart Edit Add Stop Multiple Misc From Schedule Delete Print Close Figure 134 Transactions screen e Navigation buttons Click the Navigation buttons to scroll to previous and next Navigation buttons months The navigation button at the top of the scroll bar takes you to the previous month the button at the bottom takes you to the next month Adding and Editing Transactions Adding a transaction enables you to record a time entry on behalf of an employee For example you might need to add a missed Clock Out add a lunch or break or enter a vacation day Examples of transactions are Clocked In Punching In for the day Clocked Out Punching Out for the day Swipe and Go Swipe and go transaction Out For Lunch Punching Out for lunch In From Lunch Punching In from lunch Out On Break Punching Out for break January 2009 Time America Inc 162 TA100 Pro Manual In From Break Punching In from break Enter Department Transferring departments Enter Tips Entering tips Miscellaneous Miscellaneous transactions are used to add or subtract dollars or hours including vacation and other categories of time as well as per diem tips and other categories of dollars There are several ways to add transactions All accomplish the same end but some are easier to use in certain instances All are described below Add Transactio
3. WHAT TO COPY IV Shift Info IV Job lv Work IV Department DEFINE COPY Copy from selected Employee Copy forever starting on 12 20 2002 Fri stoppingon 12 20 2002 Fri Copy to selected Employee C starting on hire date startingon 12 20 2002 Fri OK Cancel Figure 102 Copy Schedule Details 3 Fill in the settings as appropriate Setting Definition Code Displays the code of the available Template Template Name Displays the name of the available Template Display Click this button to display the details of the selected Template What to Copy These settings define what will be copied Shift Info Check this box to copy scheduled starting and stopping times Work Check this box to copy which days are selected for Work Department Check this box to copy the Department assignments Job Check this box to copy the Job assignments Define Copy These settings define when the template will be copied O January 2009 Time America Inc 131 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Copy From These settings define the date range that will Starting On Copy forever Stop On Copy to Starting on hire date Starting on date 4 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Schedule screen January 2009 Time America Inc Definition be copied from Enter the date from which you wish to copy forward Select this option to copy the selected template from the Starting on point forward forever
4. Figure 192 Configure Auto Process Select the AutoProcess you wish to change Click the Edit button 4 Edit the settings as described in the Add an AutoProcess section Delete an AutoProcess 1 Click the Communications menu AutoProcess The Auto Process Maintenance dialog box will open 2 Select the AutoProcess you wish to delete January 2009 Time America Inc 245 TA100 Pro Manual 3 Click the Delete button You will be prompted x 7 Are you sure you want to delete Figure 193 Deletion Confirmation 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion 5 Click Close to exit the dialog box O January 2009 Time America Inc 246 TA100 Pro Manual Chapter XIII Utilities This section describes the system utilities built into TA100 Pro It includes importing and exporting reindexing system archiving system backups and more Importing It is possible to import data from other programs Employee data time transactions and departments can be imported from previous versions of the software as well as from other third party systems spreadsheets and payroll programs Advanced Import Employee data and attendance reports from third party accounting systems spreadsheets and payroll programs can be imported into TA100 Pro The original files may be in any number of formats including ASCII comma delimited Excel or Lotus 1 2 3 When imported the data is appended to the specified system database file The file
5. Figure 212 Archive Maintenance 2 Fill in the settings as appropriate Setting Ending Date FileName O January 2009 Time America Inc Definition Enter the date up to which to archive Database files are archived prior to this user defined date The ending date must be at least 14 days earlier than the Posting Unposting Historical Data date For example if you want to archive data from 1999 you would input 12 31 1999 If this is the first time you are archiving the archive file will consist of all the data from January 01 1900 to the selected date Enter a name for the archived file The Filename can be any combination of characters up to 8 digits long The default name for this file is the Ending Date of the archive 260 TA100 Pro Manual Archive To Destination Compression Method Format Span Floppies Append to File Overwrite File Overwrite Records January 2009 Time America Inc Select the destination drive for the file The options are Drive A Typically a floppy drive Drive B Typically a floppy drive Other Can be the local hard drive or any network drive Enter the destination drive letter and directory for the archived file Select the Compression method for the archived data The options are Maximum Saves as much disk space as possible but takes longer Fast Compresses quickly with high data integrity and is the default option Store Only Does
6. Figure 87 Adding a new Benefit Accruals policy 3 Fill in the Code and Name fields as described in the Configuring Benefit Accruals section 4 Click the Add button to display the Accumulator dialog box January 2009 Time America Inc 110 TA100 Pro Manual Accumulators Accumulator p sa Reference Date E Z Posting Basis Weekly vi Hie OFiscal Other Y Stant Date 07 24 2007 ES Tue Give 0 00 after o months from hire date M C Do not give hours if Employees status is inactive Accumulator Details x Straight Category hours Minimum Maximum Maximum Maximum Year Month Onetime hours calculation needed allowed carry over total a Y Add DK Cancel Figure 88 Adding a new Benefit Accrual Accumulator 5 Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Benefit Accumulators section 6 Click the Add button to display the Accumulator Details dialog box Accumulator ES Reference Date O Fiscal Other PIO PAID TIME oO ASA Posted Weekly f Year Month Accumulator Details 4 r F After 0 w 0 vw Maximum Maximum Year Month One time carry over total One time given hours 0 00 el Straight given hours at end 40 000000 Hours from categories to sum X MOI Minimum hours needed 0 00 Maximum hours allowed 000 Maximum annual carry over 0 00 Maximum total benefit hours 9999 99 Es l OK l Cancel Figure 89 Adding Accumulator Details 7 Fill
7. Update Forward 05 Fri use check boxes above for manual update Copy Rotate Multiple Misc Delete Eo Figure 97 Adding Editing a Schedule Shift 4 will open 5 Schedule details for the week of 09 25 2005 10 01 2005 Navigate to the Schedule tab of the Configure Employee window See Navigate to the week you wish the schedule to start by using the scroll bar on Click Edit Entire Week and or Shift area on Sunday of the selected week Configure Employee If you clicked Edit Entire Week the Schedules Detail for the Week dialog box If you clicked in the Shift area the Schedule Details dialog box will open Schedule Details for 01 02 2005 Tuned Wednesday Q2 Thursday Lo Friday Lo Suda Start Stop time 00 00 00 00 se Shi Sh h Sh Shit Sht v y Y v y v Y 00 00 06 00 12 00 18 00 AA proce permet pee HH mae iP Stat Soo tine Stat Stoptime Stat Skoime Swt Skoime St Stoo time Stawt Staptime Stant Sc tre Department n 09 00 14 00 09 00 28 00 05 00 18 00 09 00 18 00 09 00 14 00 0 00 16 00 0001 Customer Service Woe wah E Work Wes fe Wert LH Work Wes Job Department Department Deparment Department Department Deparment Deparment NONE Job Job deb Job Job kb Job gt gt Tesini Tesini naui Triei Update the rest of this week m caca Figure 98 Schedule Details for the Week and Schedule Details 6 Highlight from
8. When you output a report to email you will be asked to fill in the email addresses of the recipients 1 Run the report of your choice selecting Output to Email See Running a Report page 183 The Email Recipients dialog box will open AAA 5 To 3 Lo a Bee E y 3 Add Edt_ Delete Figure 166 Email Recipients 2 Fill in the settings as appropriate Setting Definition Recipient List Displays a list of the recipients to whom you ve sent reports to in the past Add Button Click this button to add a new recipient You will be prompted to enter the person s name and email address Edit Button Click this button to edit an existing recipient s Delete Button To Button O January 2009 Time America Inc information You will be prompted to enter the person s name and email address Click this button to delete an existing recipient s information Click this button to add the selected recipient to the To field of your email 195 TA100 Pro Manual CC Button Click this button to add the selected recipient to the CC Courtesy Copy field of your email BCC Button Click this button to add the selected recipient to the BCC Blind Courtesy Copy field of your email Remove Button Click this button to remove a recipient added in error 3 When all recipients are added click the OK button to send the email You will see a Processing email message but the email will not appear on scre
9. 218 TA100 Pro Manual transactions from the clock locally the central location can connect to clock only when it needs to retrieve data to process data and run reports Since TASC are stand alone clocks they will not receive Policy and employee information in the same way that other clocks do As part of the configuration of the clock you will define the rounding lockout and overtime policies as well as list which employees may use this clock This information is then programmed into the clock Configure a TASC Clock 1 Click the Communications menu Configure TASC The Configure Clock dialog box will open The dialog box contains several tabs all of which are described below Configure TASC Series Clocks General Policies Tasc Employee Diagnos Info Program Info Code Description M Active r Communication gt ilan Path Direct R5232 y Baudrate 3600 Port COM1 z SerialBaud 9600 LANID gt Converter RTS s Time difference between computer and clock 0 Y p Modem Baudrate 1200 gt Division 0000 ABC Manufactoring Company pos Phone number Start stop answer 00 00 00 Jo Ring delay 7 Supervisor Badge a DListed Number of retries 0 Code Neme Show Inactive pol Gk Cancel Figure 176 Configure a TASC Clock 2 The General tab defines the communication and general operation settings and contains the following informat
10. Displays employee badge number Select the Time Zone defined on the previous tab that applies to this employee The reject threshold indicates how closely the hand has to match the original scanned hand template The lower the number the more exact the match needs to be The Authority Level defines which clock menus employee can view or use at the clock 0 is the lowest employee and default 5 is the highest and allows complete at the clock setup supervisor Displays if the employee has a hand template saved Enter the specific hand reader for individual employee template retrieval This opens the All Clocks dialog box Here you can assign an employee to all hand readers Click this button to select hand readers individually Edit the settings assigned to the employee Delete the employee hand reader assignment 153 TA100 Pro Manual Configure TA7000 1 Navigate to the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee page 117 2 Click the Clocks tab then click the 747000 tab to display the following information Configure Employee 00003 Timecard Schedule Transactions Status Benefits Messages Wages Badges Anderson Frank Active B ank 00003 ES 00002 00004 Smith John 00005 Washington Carol 00001 5listed O Number Name M Show Inactives Hand Reader Clocks Detail TA7000 Clock ID Badge Verification Authority A Templa
11. Last Posting Date 01 01 1900 MON at 00 00 Posting Date ZEMAN MON at 00 00 Note After posting transactions prior to the posting date can no longer be added or modified I Unpost Data OK Cancel Figure 211 Post Historical Data 2 Enter the date up to which you wish to post data As posted data can no longer be edited on screen make sure that the date entered is far enough in the past to suit your needs January 2009 Time America Inc 259 TA100 Pro Manual 3 If you wish to Unpost previously posted data in order to edit it for example check the Unpost data box 4 Click OK to complete the action Archive The Archive utility removes time and attendance data from your system and stores it in another location for archive purposes Unlike the System Backup utility that only copies files the Archive utility copies specific data then deletes it from the system to free up more of the hard drive space You must Post Historical Data prior to archiving See above 1 Click the File menu Utilities Archive The Archive Maintenance dialog box will open Ending Date MEZMEM Sat Filename 06291901 ARC ARCHIVE TO DriveA C DriveB Other Destination C GENPROSARCHIVE 06291901 ARC COMPRESSION METHOD C Maximum Fast C Store only pl FILE OPTIONS T FORMA Append to file G pu co Conditional Duplicate records F Uneondtiona e Flow Dens Discard record Ll gt DK Cancel
12. Select the screen that should open automatically when TA100 Pro starts The options are Main Menu Approval Editor Employee Configure Employee and Task Organizer Select the set of icons you want displayed in TA100 Pro The options are High Quality and Low Quality High Quality displays the newest icons and Low Quality keeps the old icons Enter this user s email address This can be used to send Auto Processed reports to the user whenever they re ready NOTE This option will only be available if you have activated the SMTP feature Enter the SMTP server name Enter the display name Enter the e mail address Enter this information for email authentication Enter the user name Enter the password 4 The Divisions tab specifies the Divisions to which this user can view and contains the following information O January 2009 Time America Inc 99 TA100 Pro Manual Configure Users SYSOP OPERATOR SYSTEM Active Users Divisions Groups SELECT e ay C Range CE y RANGE Z From Add All 2 AVAILABLE 0 SELECTED Epply Gk Cancel Figure 78 Configure Users Divisions tab Setting Definition Select Determines what options are available in the bottom part of the screen The options are All Range and List All automatically grants access to all Divisions Range allows you to choose a range of Divisions for access List allows you to choose individual
13. TA100 Pro Manual Configure Export r TYPE Delimited with Commas x Save as OoOO o OK Cancel Figure 197 Configure Export 2 Click the Export File button The Open dialog box will appear A 2x Look in DBFS eck E arptinfo dbf laa autorep dbf a clckread dl la arptsel dbf sa autosets dbf 58 clock dbF la arptuser dbf sa belldet dbF a clockkey d la attend dbf sa bells dbf a cloctasc dt la autocik dbf sa category cbf sa company c sa autopoll dbf sa catexprt dbf sa dept dbF gt Files of type Table DBF Cancel Help Code Page Figure 198 Open Select the file you wish to export and click the USE button to continue Select the type of file you wish to export to See above for a list of the available file types 5 Click the Save As button to define the file name of the exported data The Save As dialog box will open A 21xi Save in Y DBFS ea ex Ed Delimited file EMDE Save Save as type File v Cancel Help dll Code Page Figure 199 Save As January 2009 Time America Inc 250 TA100 Pro Manual 6 Inthe File Name box enter the name you wish to use for the exported data file The extension will fill in automatically based on the type of file chosen in the previous dialog box 7 Click Save to continue 8 Click OK to begin the export O January 2009 Time America Inc 251 TA
14. TA100 Pro Manual Schedule Defines the user s access rights to Schedule AutoProcess settings The options are View Add Edit and Delete For more information on this feature see Configure an AutoProcess page 240 Start Allows the user to start a pre defined AutoProcess For more information on this feature see Configure an AutoProcess page 240 Configure Defines the user s access rights to clock configuration settings The options are View Ada Edit and Delete For more information on this feature see Terminal Configuration page 197 Set Date and Time Allows the user to set the date and time of the clocks Add a Security Level 1 Click the File menu Security Define Levels The Configure Security Level dialog box will open 2 Click the Add button to add a new Security Level The tabs will become available Configure Security Levels SUPERVISOR SUPERVISOR LEVEL Lodo Pame Y Active Set Date and Time Print Lists A File Daily Operations Reports System Setup Communication Security Utilities Other View Add Edit Del Reindex Repair Update C Repost from R files C Import Users Set Reprocess Date Purge A files Export Define Levels Fix Unassigned badges Archive and Restore Print Setup Who is in Backup and Restore Initialize can only be done by SYSOP v 1 Listed Check
15. 4 Edit the settings as described in the Configure Categories section January 2009 Time America Inc 41 TA100 Pro Manual 5 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Categories screen 6 Click Close to exit the Configure Categories window Delete a Category Categories that are in use cannot be deleted 1 Click the System Setup menu Categories The Configure Categories dialog box will open 2 Highlight the category you wish to delete from the list at the side of the screen 3 Click the Delete button You will be prompted xi 7 re you sure you want to delete Figure 34 Deletion Confirmation 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion 5 Click Close to exit the Configure Categories window O January 2009 Time America Inc 42 TA100 Pro Manual Policies Policies are used to store and apply the business or payroll rules governing overtime holidays etc lt is possible to have more than one set of rules within an organization so TA100 Pro makes it possible to create many Policies Each employee is assigned to the Policy that applies for him or her Configure Policies 1 Click the System Setup menu Policies The Configure Policies dialog box will open Configure Policies 001 Standard Policy dard Policy Figure 35 Configure Policies 2 There are several tabs in the Configure Policies dialog box each with its own settings The first tab General tab defines gen
16. Converter RTS C SD Time difference between computer and clock 0 z ae Ethemet Division 0000 Air Cargo Transit Inc E IP Address 132 1651 200 Supervisor IP Port 3000 Prefix for enty TT Default date Prefix for recall Default Time I pene kai Baudrate 1200 z r Input a np Emplayas Badga Phone number Initial source source by supervisor Start stop answer 07 00 00 00 IV Swipe IV Swipe a A Ring delay 7 T Key T Key a eid i I Bar Code I Bar Code Number of retries 7 ul Gf Cancel Figure 183 Example Add a Clock Fill in the settings as described in the Configure section for the type of clock you are adding TA500 600 PC Clock page 198 ATS page 226 Hand Reader page 229 If there is already a clock of this type defined the Default Clock Add dialog box will open January 2009 Time America Inc 234 TA100 Pro Manual Configure TA500 Series Clocks General Configure Code LA Description La Man F Active pelean pi Would you like to copy the information from an existing clock into the new clock COPY DEFAULTS FROM LAX LAX Main 2 Listed Code Name T Show Inactives Edit Delete Print Close Figure 184 Default Clock Add 5 Highlight the clock whose settings you would like to copy or click No to start from scratch Enter a unique code for this clock up to four characters Enter a Description of the clock i e Warehou
17. Figure 71 Security Levels Reports tab Setting Definition Period Reports Grants access to the reports such as Timecards Who s Scheduled Coverage etc Weekly Reports Grants access to the reports such as Weekly Hours Attendance Approaching Overtime etc Daily Reports Grants access to the reports such as Who s in Who s not in Daily Hours etc Payroll Export Grants access to run the Payroll Export Listings Grants access to the reports in the Listings category For more information see Listings page 6 The System Setup tab grants access to features under the System Setup menu and contains the following information Configure Security Levels SUPERVISOR SUPERVISOR LEVEL Codo TC Name TC SUPERVISOR Y Active Set Date and Time E Pint Lists A File Daily Operations Reports System Setup Communication View Add Edit Delete View Add Edit Delete Main Company Department Divisions Job Categories Bell Schedules Policies Shifts Holidays Groups 1 Listed Figure 72 Security Levels System Setup tab Setting Definition January 2009 Time America Inc 93 TA100 Pro Manual Main Company Divisions Categories Policies Shifts Holidays Groups Department Job O January 2009 Time America Inc Defines the user s access rights to the Main Company settings The only o
18. January 2009 Time America Inc 12 TA100 Pro Manual InstallShield Wizard a Sentinel System Driver Setup is preparing the InstallShield Wizard e which will guide you through the program setup process Please wait Checking Windows R Installer Version AAA Figure 8 Sentinel Driver Installation 12 The Sentinel System Driver InstallShield Wizard will appear The Sentinel System Driver is necessary for TA100 Pro to be able to access the database files 113 Sentinel System Driver InstallShield Wizard xj Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Sentinel System Driver The InstallShield R Wizard will allow you to modify repair or remove Sentinel System Driver To continue click Next Cancel Figure 9 Sentinel InstallShield Wizard 13 Click the Next button to begin the Sentinel System Drive Installation The Setup Type screen will appear 113 Sentinel System Driver InstallShield Wizard xj Setup Type N Choose the setup type that best suits your needs S Please select a setup type All program features will be installed Requires the most disk space Choose which program features you want installed and where they o will be installed Recommended for advanced users lt Back Cancel Figure 10 Sentinel Driver Setup Type 14 Verify that Complete is selected and click Next to continue The Ready to Install screen will appear January 2009 Time America Inc 13 TA100 Pro Ma
19. O January 2009 Time America Inc Definition These settings allow you filter which employees data will be printed 186 TA100 Pro Manual Full Time Part Time Both Permanent Temporary Both Hourly Salary Sort By Group By Output to O January 2009 Time America Inc Check Full Time to print only employees whose Status is Full Time Check Part Time to print only employees whose Status is Part Time Check Both to print both Full Time and Part Time employees Check Permanent to print only employees whose Status is Permanent Check Temporary to print only employees whose Status is Temporary Check Both to print both Permanent and Temporary employees Check Hourly to print only employees whose Status is Hourly Check Salary to print only employees whose Status is Salary Check Both to print both Hourly and Salary employees Select the setting by which you want employee records to sort The options are Number Employee ID Number or Name Select the setting by which you want employee records to group organize The options are None Department Division and Group Select the media to which you wish to output the report The options are Screen The report will preview on screen You are then able to print from the preview Printer The report will be sent directly to the printer File The report will be sent to a FoxPro report file Email The report will be sent via email If you cho
20. Select the option to copy only up to a certain date Enter the date in the space provided These settings define the date range that will be copied to Select this option to paste the copied schedule starting from the employee s hire date forward Select this option to paste the copied schedule from a user defined date forward Enter the date in the space provided 132 TA100 Pro Manual Employee Transactions Tab The Transaction tab displays the individual punches for the employee NOTE Tasks associated with the Transactions tab such as editing and adding punches are covered in their own section See Timecard and Transaction Maintenance page 160 Description 1 Navigate to the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee page 119 2 Click the Transactions tab to display the following information 00005 Timecard Schedule tatus Benefits Messages Wages Badges ne Detail Smith John ero Template Day Date Key Prompt Clock 2 ze 2y CLOCKED IN 00 Division ALL Pa o ENTER DEPARTMENT ool Group far Mon 12 09 2002 15 57 59 4 CLOCKED OUT 001 00005 Tue 12 10 2002 06 55 37 CLOCKED IN 001 00005 z Tue 12 10 2002 07 40 24 0 ENTER DEPARTMENT 001 00005 s lt Pior find et Tue 12 10 2002 11 38 29 0 ENTER DEPARTMENT 001 00005 00001 Washington Carol Tue 12 10 2002 15 53 53 CLOCKED OUT 001 00005 N Wed 12 11 2002 07 03 03 CLOCKED IN 001 00005 ae piste d k Wed 12 11
21. This allows the system to forecast a number of hours for floating employees when doing forecast reporting Unlike an employee assigned to a fixed shift a floating employee may work varied shifts as long as he she works the total number of hours required for the pay period 57 TA100 Pro Manual Shift Details Add Edit Delete buttons Rounding In Out Rounding Add Edit In Out Rounding Lunch Rounding Add Edit Lunch Rounding Break Rounding Add Edit Break Rounding January 2009 Time America Inc Displays the individual shifts that comprise the shift group Each row in the box is an individual shift If the Shift Details box is blank no individual shifts have been created for this group These buttons allow you to maintain the Shifts within this Shift Group These settings determine which Rounding Rules will apply to all the Shifts within this Shift Group Click the arrow to select time rounding rules for In and Out punches used by the shift group NOTE These rules apply to the entire group and not to the individual shifts Click this button to Add or Edit the In Out Rounding Rules Click the arrow to select time rounding rules for Lunch punches used by the shift group NOTE These rules apply to the entire group and not to the individual shifts Click this button to Add or Edit the Lunch Rounding Rules Click the arrow to select time rounding rules for Break punches used by the shift gro
22. performs different functions Job Click this button to set a wage that applies whenever the employee works for a particular Job This can be used to pay different rates when the employee performs different functions Exempt Check this option to indicate the employee is Exempt Report Hours From TA100 Pro can report exempt employees hours either from actual punches or from their schedule regardless of their punches Check Actual to have TA100 Pro report the hours as they are punched at the clock Check Schedule to have TA100 Pro report hours from the employee s schedule The Attendance Clocking settings will become available when this option is checked and need to be configured January 2009 Time America Inc 147 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Definition Attendance These settings become available when the Report Clocking Hours From Schedule option is checked Check Paired Punching to indicate that the employee should punch In and Out but TA100 Pro will ignore the actual times of the punches and report the scheduled times and duration Check In Only to indicate that the employee only needs to punch In each day and TA100 Pro will report the scheduled times and duration Check None to indicate that TA100 Pro should automatically report the scheduled times and duration without the employee having to punch at all Pay Overtime Check this option to make the employee eligible for overtime based on the Policy to
23. 1 2 below it About TA100 This screen displays assistance company and system information for your reference The box at the top of the screen provides the address and phone number for Time America Inc or your local authorized dealer The lower left box displays the product registration company number version and limitations The lower right box details the modules that you have installed in the TA100 system 00 Help Topics In the Help Topics window click the Contents tab Double click the topic you wish to browse This will expand the sub topics If necessary double click the sub topic you wish to browse article Use the Help Index When you find the article you are interested in double click it to open the In the Help Topics window click the Index tab Type in the topic you are looking for When you find the article you are interested in double click it to open the article January 2009 Time America Inc 23 TA100 Pro Manual Use Help Search 1 Inthe Help Topics window click the Search tab Type in the topic you are looking for 2 3 If necessary select a word from the list of suggestions 4 When you find the article you are interested in double click it to open the article Return to the Help Topics Window After reading an article you may return to the Help Topics window by clicking the Help Topics button on the toolbar Print a Help Topic E TA100Pro Help
24. Choose Regular if no overtime is paid regular wages or OT1 OT2 or OT3 to pay the overtime wages defined above Under OT1 OT2 and OT3 enter the number of daily hours in HH MM format that must be worked before that overtime level will be acknowledged by the system For example if Sunday hours start at OT1 and OT2 begins after 8 hours enter 8 00 in Sunday s OT2 Daily Qualifier Only overtime levels above the entry in Start at OT Level are available 50 TA100 Pro Manual Reset at Day End Consecutive Days Num of Days Minimum Daily Hours Total OT Level On Days that Qualify After hrs OT Level Reset Overtime at Cycle End O January 2009 Time America Inc Check this box to force any overtime hours that roll into the next day after midnight to be processed using the next day s rules Clear the check box to process hours accumulated past midnight using the OT rate from the previous day Check this box if overtime is paid automatically after working a certain number of consecutive days NOTE Additional options appear when this box is checked Enter the number of consecutive days that must be worked before overtime starts Enter the minimum number of daily hours that must be worked on each consecutive day to qualify for overtime Enter the minimum number of total hours that must be worked for all of the consecutive days to qualify for overtime Select the overtime level that applies
25. Communication Comm Type RS485 or Serial Modem Ethemet BaudRate 9500 z Mme SMP Modem Number Comm Port COM 1 Fi Retries 0 IP Address PIP Port Time difference between computer and clock fo Division 0000 ABC Manufactoring Company Figure 180 Configure Hand Reader Clock 2 The General tab configures communication settings and contains the following information 229 TA100 Pro Manual O January 2009 Time America Inc Setting Code ID Description Active Model Idle Prompt RS485 or Serial Modem Ethernet Baud Rate Comm Port Retries Definition This is a required field Enter a unique code up to 4 characters to identify the clock Once defined this code cannot be changed Enter a unique ID number to identify the clock This number will also be programmed into the clock Enter a description of the clock This description will be seen in the system and on reports This field can be used to describe the clock type and it s location in your facility i e HP3000 In BUILDING TWO The clock description can be up to 30 characters long Click the Active check box to indicate that the clock is currently in use Uncheck this box if the clock is not being used at this time Select the model of your Hand Reader unit The options e ID3D e HP2000 e HP3000 e HP4000 Enter the message text that displays on the time clock when in an idle st
26. Hide Print rid Options DER Contents Index Search Type in the keyword to find timecard Select Topic to display Approval Editor Selection A Configure Employee Configure Employee Badges Configure Employee Badges Assign Bad Configure Employee Benefits Configure Employee Benefits Benefit Det Configure Employee Benefits Benefit Det Configure Employee Employee Configure Employee Employee Example Configure Employee Messages Configure Employee Messages All Clock Conficure Eminuer Messanes Messane Y lt gt Display Figure 20 About TA100 This screen displays assistance company and system information for your reference The box at the top of the screen provides the address and phone number for Time America nc or your local authorized dealer The lower left box displays the product registration company number version and limitations The lower right box details the modules that you have installed in the TA100 system o Help Article You can print any help topic by clicking the Print button on the toolbar e amp f Back Prit Options Hide Contents Index Search Type in the keyword to find timecard List Topics Select Topic to display Approval Editor Selection Configure Employee Configure Employee Badges Configure Employee Badges Assign Bad Configure Employ
27. Highlight the Department you wish to edit from the list at the side of the screen 3 Click the Edit button The General screen will become available for you to edit the selected Department NOTE The Code field cannot be edited Edit the settings as described in the Configure Departments section Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Department screen 6 Click Close to exit the Configure Department dialog box Delete a Department Departments that are in use cannot be deleted 1 Click the System Setup menu Department The Configure Department dialog box will open 2 Highlight the Department you wish to delete from the list at the side of the screen January 2009 Time America Inc 78 TA100 Pro Manual 3 Click the Delete button You will be prompted xi 7 Are you sure you want to delete Figure 59 Deletion Confirmation 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion 5 Click Close to exit the Configure Department dialog box Jobs Jobs are the second level in Job Costing Jobs are used to track employee s time and labor cost in terms of hours and dollars Jobs serve many purposes in TA100 Pro Wages can be associated with the job and employee Hours and wage budgets can be set for the job enabling accurate budget vs actual reporting Jobs are optional and only available when the Department and Job Use Flags are checked on the Configure tab of the Main Company dialog box Also if you change
28. Launching and Logging In to TA100 Pro The instructions in this section assume that you already know the User ID and password to be used Check with your system administrator if you are unsure of which User ID to use 1 Click the Start Programs TA100 Pro TA100 Pro or double click the TA100 Pro Icon on the Desktop 2 TA100 Pro will open and display the Login screen Registered to TIME AMERICA INC Serial Number TA99999999 10 Version Number 4 01b User Password FE e This program is protected by U S and international copyright laws Figure 18 TA100 Pro Login Screen January 2009 Time America Inc 19 TA100 Pro Manual 3 Type your User ID in the User ID field then press either ENTER or the TAB key to advance to the Password field 4 Type your password in the Password field and press either ENTER or the TAB key to access TA100 Pro 5 The Main Window will open A 00034 Exiting the System You can use any of the following methods to close or exit out of TA100 Pro e Click File Exit on the menu bar e Click the Exit button on the toolbar e Click the Windows Close button the X at the far right of the menu bar e Press ALT F4 on the keyboard January 2009 Time America Inc 20 TA100 Pro Manual Tips and Techniques TA100 Pro is designed to be user friendly and as such there are common techniques to making working in TA100 Pro easier Some of these t
29. month the first month of employment Fiscal Date Enter the date on which this employee s or your company s fiscal year starts This date can be used as the Reference Date on which benefits carry over Use Alternative Use this date to override the Hire Date field as the Hire Date for date an employee s benefits should begin benefits User Defined fields Division Group Holiday group Accrual Rule Use PC Clock There are six user defined fields Enter information as desired For more information see Configure Main Company page 28 Select the pre defined Division to which the employee belongs Select the pre defined Group to which the employee belongs Select the pre defined Holiday Group to which the employee belongs If Holiday Groups were not created you may leave at the default listing of All Holidays Select the pre defined Benefits Accrual rule that applies to this employee Check this block to allow permissions for the PC Clock Add an Employee TA100 Pro uses an Add Employee wizard to walk you through the steps of adding a new employee Once you have completed the Detail screen additional screens will open one after another until all the settings for the employee are complete 1 Navigate to the Detail tab of the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee Details page 155 2 Click the Add button to add a new Employee The Detail tab will become available January 2009 Time Ame
30. 0 oy 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 000 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 ooo 000 0o 5 Listed 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 os Nem Reprocess Add Trans _ Edit Add Start Edit Add Stop Multiple Misc From Schedule Delete Le Show osc s A EAS ate Ls E D Figure 93 Configure Employee January 2009 Time America Inc 119 TA100 Pro Manual Employee List The Employee List window contains a list of the employees in the database Sorting options are also available as described below 00003 Anderson Frank Active Anderson Frank Uc003 A Baines Peter OOo Jones David 00004 Smith John 00005 Washington Carol 00001 Show Group Selection Show Salary Selection Show Fulltime Selection oo00g Show Permanent Selection Find Emp yee SEARCH BY Code O Last name O Badge ES 5 Listed O Number Name Show Inactives Figure 94 Employee List section Setting Definition Selected Employee Displays the employee name and number of the selected employee gt Show Division Selection Select a Division to only Fitters view employees assigned to that Division Show Group Selection Select a Group to only view employees assigned to that Group Show Salary Selection Select ALL YES or NO to view employees assigned to that option Show Fulltime Selection Select ALL YES or NO to view employees assigned to that option Show Perma
31. 6 Listed Note The system will automatically update schedules use check boxes above for manual update Number O Name Copy Rotate Multiple Misc l Delete Y Show Inactives Figure 96 Configure Employee Schedule tab Settin Definition Calendar The calendar will display three weeks at a time The currently selected week will display in white the previous and following week display in yellow The current week will also have a field where you can edit the entire week For more information on this feature see the Edit Entire Week section The Schedule calendar can display either work Shift information or Job Costing information which Job Step Operation and Task the employee is scheduled to work You can switch back and forth easily For more information on this feature see the Schedule Details section January 2009 Time America Inc 125 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Date Shift Department Job Work Override Template Update Back Update Forward Copy Button Rotate Button Multiple Misc Button Delete Definition Displays the date Displays the Shift selected for that particular day NOTE Before a shift is assigned the system will default the shift assignment to a floater shift Displays the Department number for that particular day Displays the Job number for that particular day Check this box to indicates whether or not the employee is scheduled to work that day an
32. AN 152 Protesta cea te oasad 152 CONF JUTE ccccococcccnononcnnnoononnnnnnonnononcnnnnnns 152 154 Programmed KeyS c cccccococcccconocccccononcccnnnnancnnnnnns 22 Punch defaults configure e ion 44 RON ac orina ini 253 Real road 253 REDOMS unan aa 182 183 e a coords 195 late d o SF lre sre aa EE on 188 CA 183 A viene aie ii nary al 183 SCNECUIING otsera ueri i iai aaae 240 ROprOCesSS iaeia ad aa det 256 Reprocess Date coooccccccnnoccccnnoccccnoncnnccnnnnncnnnns 256 Requirements hardware oooooccccccnccocociccoccnccnncos 10 ROTO O ita cata 264 R Files PUT ita Wilde da Ata 258 CG O 258 Rounding Rules Mi id Ae Ae 67 luisana tia 68 Running a Report DY INdiVIdUAL coicococossciooeliccoccionnerorioacino cathe 188 January 2009 Time America Inc DY ANGE anna i a auas 183 Schedules ee 125 ASSIGN 126 CODY cinsin ii 131 Celete iii avd dd 128 OMPlOYCC occcccccocccccnnoncccncnn narco 125 rotat eeri eninde 129 templates ia e A ae 130 SOCUIILY eiii enti tai 86 adda HSol secs ada talados 101 change password cocoococococcconononcnnnananannnnnnnns 104 configure levels oococonncinnnconnccnnonanonacnnancccnn 87 CS serrer reenn ens 97 User Maintenance oconccccccnnnococnnnnconancnnnannnos 97 WNO S logged Mesion s 104 Security Levels add A a nines R 96 CONMQUIC ati aea a a a 87 delete EA E E E A cb E 97 litro idas 96 ae a e E E P E tact E S A 197 Set Date and Time 2 236 Shift Group F166 AA A AES 65 C
33. About this Manual This section describes how to use this manual In addition to providing you with step by step knowledge for performing various procedures this manual will help you get the most out of TA100 Pro Disclaimer Every attempt is made to keep this manual up to date However software enhancements do occur and the content of this manual is subject to change without notice Before using this manual verify that the information contained in it is current Proper installation configuration and operation of the software are contingent upon reading and following the procedures contained in the latest version of the manual Technical Support If you encounter a problem or need technical support after reading this manual please contact your local Sales and Service Representative Your local representative has received training in the areas of software installation configuration operation and advanced troubleshooting They are qualified to provide you with the highest level of technical support When Calling Technical Support for Assistance If possible contact your authorized local Sales and Service Representative while at the computer experiencing the problem so you can quickly answer questions and implement the solutions suggested by your representative Before calling gather the following information Your local Sales and Service Representative will need this information to assist you The version and serial number o
34. All Employees Check this option to restore data for all employees January 2009 Time America Inc 262 TA100 Pro Manual Individual Employees Check this option to restore data for individuals You have the opportunity to choose employees after clicking the OK button Date Range Enter the date range for which you wish to restore records TIP To restore all transactions for the chosen employees contained in this archive put in 01 01 1900 in the first field and today s date in the second field 3 Click OK If All Employees was selected the restoration process will begin immediately If Individual Employees was selected you will be prompted to select the employees after which the restoration will begin System Backup System Backup takes a copy of the database files as of the date of the backup These backup files can be restored if necessary If for some reason the computer network crashes the data can be loaded into a new or existing installation of TA100 Pro with no downtime Backing up TA100 Pro should be done on a regular basis 1 Click the File menu Utilities System Backup The System Backup Maintenance dialog box will open System Backup Maintenance q Backup fie name FEAE BACKUP TO C Drive A Destination FLOPPIES C DriveB Other C GENPROSBACKUPSBACKUP SQZ COMPRESSION METHOD Maximum El Fast El Store only F LowD OK Cancel Figure 214 System Backup Main
35. Configure Categories dialog box will open Configure Categories PTO Paid Time Off BRY BEREAVEMENT Family Illness HOLIDAY JURY DUTY LUNCH MILITARY LEAVE SICK NON PAID OTHER PAID TIME PERSONAL DAY PER DIEM 1 PER DIEM 2 SICK PAID CASH TIPS CHARGE TIPS VACATION WORKED TIME 20 Listed Code C Name T Show Inactives General Export Codes Add Edit Delete Print Close Figure 31 Categories 2 The Configure Categories screen displays the following information Setting Code Equals category number from hand reader Name Active Do you wish to export this category O January 2009 Time America Inc Definition This is a required field Enter a code up to 4 alphanumeric characters to identify the category Once saved this code cannot be changed When entering a Category into a Hand Reader only a numerical value can be entered Use this field to assign a number representing the Category Code This is a required field Enter the category name as it will appear in the system and on reports The category name can be up to 30 characters long Click the Active check box to indicate that the category is currently in use Clear this check box if the category is not being used at this time This indicates whether this category will be included in the export information created for your payroll service If this option is selected the Export tab will become availabl
36. Divisions for access List When List is selected a list of all the Divisions in your company will appear based on what was selected above Add Add All Add adds the currently selected Division to the Selected list Add All adds all of the Divisions to the Selected list Remove Remove Remove removes the currently selected All Division from the Selected list Remove All removes all of the Divisions from the Selected list 5 The Groups tab specifies the Groups which this user can view and contains the following information O January 2009 Time America Inc 100 TA100 Pro Manual Configure Users SYSOP OPERATOR SYSTEM Active Users Divisions Groups SELECT e gy gt RANGE From foo LUST 2 AVAILABLE 0 SELECTED Anal i Cancel Figure 79 Configure Users Groups tab Setting Definition Select Determines what options are available in the bottom part of the screen The options are All Range and List All automatically grants access to all Groups Range allows you to choose a range of Groups for access List allows you to choose individual Groups for access List When List is selected a list of all the Groups in your company will appear based on what was selected above Add Add All Add adds the currently selected Group to the Selected list Add All adds all of the Groups to the Selected list Remove Remove Remove removes the currently selected All Group from the S
37. Employee window See Configure Employee page 119 2 Click the All Clocks button to add a new message to all clocks this employee uses The Message Assignment dialog box will open All Clocks E MESSAGE ri Message OK Cancel Figure 117 Add a Message to All Clocks 3 Enter the message you wish to send Up to 20 characters may be entered Or check the Default message to Employee name to send the employee s First Initial and Last Name 4 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Messages screen O January 2009 Time America Inc 145 TA100 Pro Manual Edit a Message 1 Navigate to the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee page 119 Highlight the Message you wish to edit Click the Edit button Edit the settings as described in the Add a Message section a FON Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Messages screen Delete a Message 1 Navigate to the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee page 119 Highlight the Message you wish to delete Click the Delete button You will be prompted xi 7 Are you sure you want to delete Figure 118 Deletion Confirmation 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion Employee Wages The Wages tab specifies the FLSA status exempt or non exempt and pay rate s for the employee For non exempt employees wages can either be Global or associated with the Department or Job on which the employee works All options are
38. Letter gt gt l y 8 Underlined Letters All menus menu items and buttons have an underlined letter which allows keyboard access to that item O January 2009 Time America Inc 21 TA100 Pro Manual e To access a menu press the ALT key in conjunction with the letter that is underlined e To access an item on the menu first open the menu and then press the letter that is underlined e To select a button press the CTRL key in conjunction with the letter that is underlined Keyboard Usage Examples To Do This Select an item from the Main Press ALT and the underlined letter Window For example press ALT F to open the File menu Select a menu command Press the underlined letter only This is true for submenus too For example type S to select Security Select a button Press CTRL plus the underlined letter For example press CTRL E to choose the Edit button Hot Keys Some menus such as the Help menu are accessible using Hot Keys These keys or key combinations correspond to a menu item Instead of typing the underlined letter in the command you can simply press the Hot Key For example to view your system configuration press F11 Also all date fields have a calendar dropdown to access right click on the date Additional Keyboard Access Other keys and key combinations are available in the system They are explained below To Press Exit the current function or window
39. Listed Bar Code MN O Bar Code Number of retries 9 2of5 Code128 UPC 13 K aac Figure 171 Configure TA715 TA777 TA780 Clocks General Tab 2 The General tab defines the communication and general operation settings and contains the following information Settin Definition Code This is a required field Enter a unique code up to 4 characters to identify the clock Once defined this code cannot be changed Description Enter a description of the clock This description will be seen in the system and on reports This field can be used to describe the clock type and it s location in your facility i e TA715 In BUILDING TWO The clock description can be up to 30 characters long Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the clock is currently in use Uncheck this box if the clock is not being used at this time January 2009 Time America Inc 208 TA100 Pro Manual Readers None or Finger Path Port Serial Baud Lan Baud Rate LAN ID Ethernet IP Address IP Port Modem O January 2009 Time America Inc THIS WILL ONLY SHOW FOR THE TA780 SERIES Only select finger of the clock will accept fingerprints Select the type of connection this clock will use The options are e Direct RS232 e LAN RS485 e Modem e Ethernet External For more information on these connections see Types of Connections page 197 Select the communications port on your computer that will b
40. NOTE If the Rounding Rules are not defined see Add Edit Rounding for more information 4 Click OK to commit the changes and close the Configure Shift Group dialog box 5 Click the Add button next to the Shift Details window to add a new Shift The Details tab will become available 6 Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Shift section 7 Click OK to commit the changes and close the Shift dialog box 8 Click on the Differential tab to add a shift differential 9 Click the Add button 10 Enter the From and To in HH MM 11 Select the Day and Differential number that will apply to this shift 12 Click Close to exit the Configure Shift Group dialog box NOTE See Add A Shift to enter the specific shifts within this shift group Edit a Shift Group 1 Click the System Setup menu Shift The Configure Shift Group dialog box will open 2 Highlight the Shift Group you wish to edit from the list at the side of the screen 3 Click the Edit button The Groups screen will become available for you to edit the selected Shift Group O January 2009 Time America Inc 65 TA100 Pro Manual Edit the Name Flex Open Forecasted hours for Floaters and select the Rounding as describe in the Configure Shift Group section Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Shift Group screen Click Close to exit the Configure Shift Group dialog box NOTE See Edit a Shift to edit shift within this shift group Delet
41. Ordered by Code Date range 08 13 2001 08 26 2001 Tuesday 08 28 2001 07 51 23 Page 1 ABC Widgets TIME CARD REPORT Washington Carol DATE DAY _CTGY START This em ployee has missing punches in the selected date range STOP HOURS REG on oT2 OT3 UNPAID _TOTAL DOLLARS 0813 2001 MON 08 14 2001 TUE WORK WORK 08 15 2001 WED WORK 0816 2001 THU WORK 0817 2001 FRI WORK 08 20 2001 MON WORK 08 21 2001 TUE VAC 08 22 2001 WED VAC 08 23 2001 THU VAC 08 24 2001 FRI WORK 07 07 ID 0924 07 56 IL 07 01 1205 0858 0857 0000 06 58 0000 0000 07 54 IL EMPLOYEE TOTALS 1601 0924 1605 1604 0 00 0 00 215 7 75 875 6 60 8 00 1 00 7 00 0 00 1 00 8 00 0 00 1205 1601 1603 8 00 8 00 8 00 9 00 9 00 8 00 8 00 8 00 7 00 8 00 8 00 160006 8 00 61 75 66 75 EMPLOYEE Name SUPERVISOR Baines P eter DATE DAY _CTGY START This em ployee has missing punches in the selected date range STOP HOURS REG on oT2 or UNPAID _TOTAL DOLLARS 0813 2001 MON WORK 08 14 2001 TUE WORK 08 5 2001 WED WORK 1624 IL 1558 1604 2234 0058 OG 0053 OD 8 50 7 50 1 00 8 50 8 75 775 1 00 8 75 0 00 0 00 2234 Figure 164 Example On Screen Report Preview Print Preview ES n pa e S Figure 165 Print Toolbar 3 The Report Preview window contains several tool buttons Reading from left to right these are Setting
42. REG 2 99 99 99 39 IV Thursday REG 2 99 99 99 39 IV Friday REG 2 99 99 99 99 I Saturday Abo J Num of Minimum Hours OT Days Daily Total Level m m m a a a ay ox coc Figure 38 Policies Overtime tab T On days that qualify After OT Hrs Level oroo ooo rec Poma T Reset at Overtime Cycle End Setting Pay OT Overtime Cycle Definition Check this option to pay overtime to employees using this Policy This field is required Enter the pay period that you use to calculate overtime For example if overtime is paid after 40 hours of work per week select the Weekly option This Overtime Cycle is independent of the Pay Period specified in Policy Maintenance but must not be greater than the policy pay period For example if the policy Pay Period is Biweekly you may select an Overtime Cycle of Weekly or Biweekly but not Semimonthly or Monthly since these cycles are longer than the policy pay period Weekly Overtime is calculated weekly Biweekly Overtime is calculated every two weeks Semimonthly Overtime is calculated twice a month Monthly Overtime is calculated once a month January 2009 Time America Inc 49 TA100 Pro Manual Overtime Definition OT Level Period Limit Multiplier Daily Overtime Day of the Week Start at OT Level Daily Qualifier O January 2009 Time America Inc These settings define when and how overtime
43. Shifts Differential tab Setting Differential List From To Day of the Week January 2009 Time America Inc Definition Displays the Start Stop and daily status of an existing differential Select the starting time for the pay differential Select the ending time for the pay differential Select the differential premium code D1 D3 assigned to the shift each day of the week For example a 10 00 P M to 6 00 A M shift may receive a 5 00 per hour premium on weekends but only 2 50 per hour premium Monday through Friday If no differential premium code applies to a particular day select No Differential 64 TA100 Pro Manual Add a Shift Group 1 Click the System Setup menu Shift The Configure Shift dialog box will open 2 Click the Add button to add a new Shift Group The Groups tab will become available Configure Shifts 001 Groups le all Diarra Standard Shift Code Name Active T Flex Open Forcasted hours for floaters 0 0000 r Shift Details Start Cutoff Stop Gross Lunch Total Number Round ing In 4 Out Rounding Lunch Rounding Break Rounding NONE DEFINED NONE DEFINED none DEFINED y Add In Out Rounding Add Lunch Rounding Add Break Rounding Fay Gf Cancel Figure 48 Adding a new Shift Group 3 Fill in the Code Name Flex Open Forecasted hours for Floaters and select the Rounding as describe in the Configure Shift Group section
44. TASOO TA600 TASC Hand Reader ATS Series Figure 168 Clocks Menu Types of Connections Time America clocks are capable of communicating in one of four different ways e The Direct or RS 232 serial port solution is designed for a single short range terminal The terminal should not be placed beyond 50 feet of shielded wire from a PC Each terminal requires its own serial connection to a PC using an RS 232 serial port e The LAN or RS 485 solution is designed for a direct connection long range single or multi terminal system RS 485 allows up to 32 terminals to be networked to one PC serial port creating a Local Area Network LAN Each terminal is connected to a LAN distribution box These boxes connect to the Polling PC with two conductor shielded cable The total length of the serial connection can be as much as 5000 feet almost 1 mile Each terminal is identified using a unique ID e The modem option is designed for a single or multi unit environment The modem solution provides two additional options internal modem or external modem Generally this option is utilized when the terminal is located out of cabling range or if the use of cabling is being avoided When data needs to be downloaded TA100 Pro can place a call using a modem in the PC to the terminal download the information and disconnect NOTE The computer that polls the clocks will need a modem in order to call the January 2009 Time Americ
45. TSA E ERSS 134 Configure Employee Status ci iii ia 134 Add Employee Status A a it EN 135 Edit Employee Status 00 ss leia 136 Delete Employee Status voii e ra dt lei 136 EMPLOYEE BENEFITS TAB asure e e the rtbekevcusets tun toueevecbeesspues due cucesteney ensues ENEA cyte E a oS 137 Benefit Entitlement Config re neriie nosse a ti at ai 137 Benefit Entitlement Employee Benefit Details oonooconcccnnncconicnnnnncnnanonnnncnnnnonnnc cono n ron nc nono n ron cnn n ron nana ncon anciano 138 Benefit Entitlement Grant Benefit TiM oooncinnnnnnnnnnonnncnnonnnnnnnnn cono cnno crono nono nena no nn nenn nena nro n enn n cnn cn enn n anne ci necnnos 139 Benefit Entitlement Delete a Detalla nad atera aida decae ie dad ceci 139 Benefit Accruals CONfi QUE ovina il ras 140 Benefit Accruals Update Employee Benefits ccccccccsccesscescessceescesecusecsecsecseecseeessesseeseseeeeeseseeeeseeeneenseeeaes 141 Benefit Accruals Employee Benefit Details ooonoconnccinncnnnnnconannnnnnconononnno nono nonnn cono non nn conan ron nn cnn nro nn nan nro nncnnns 141 Benefit Accruals Manual Benefit AdjustMPNt oooonccocnnonnnnnnnnannnnnnanononaon nono cnn onn cono nn none on none ana rnn cone nana nc on cra cane rn ninos 142 Benefits Accrual Delete a Manual AdjusStM Nl oooncnicnionnocnnonnnnnnnnncona cono cnno cono nn nora nono nonn conan nine nin nnnn cnn cn nannn ci necnnos 143 EMPLOYEE MESSAGES TAB ie Jevscs sevitedpespucevesegscasysse
46. This option should only be used when basic clock setup has been changed since the initial programming Check this option to send pre defined Bell Schedule assigned to the clock Bell schedules are only checked at midnight so a bell will not ring on the same day the bell schedule was downloaded The Bell Module must be installed to use this option Check this option to send employee messages to the clock These settings only apply to the Hand Reader clocks The options are Send Hand Templates Select this option to send employee hand templates to the clock This can be used to upload a template to a new clock or to restore templates to a clock that has been cleared Clear Templates Check this option to clear the templates from the clock USE THIS OPTION VERY CAREFULLY as it will delete all existing templates in the clock and employees will not be able to punch until the templates are restored Retrieve Hand Templates Check this option to download new hand templates from the clock for input into the TA100 Pro database 239 TA100 Pro Manual Process Punches Check this option to automatically put the after polling punches into the online timecards of the employees 4 Click the Poll button to start the polling process Configure an AutoProcess The Auto Process feature allows you to schedule the following tasks to run automatically at pre determined times e Poll one or more time clocks e Launch executable pr
47. Time America Inc Definition Displays a list of the employees that can use this clock Includes employee code employee name employee badge number verification authority level and if they have a fingerprint template saved Verify This option will only verify employee number with fingerprint Identify This option will identify employee from the fingerprint only Click this button to select employees based on Division Employees selected are assigned the default Authority and Verification automatically NOTE If you use this method to choose employees you may want to Edit the employee in order to choose another Authority and Verification Click this button to select employees based on Group Employees selected are assigned the default Authority and Verification automatically NOTE If you use this method to choose employees you may want to Edit the employee in order to choose another Authority and Verification Click this button to remove all employees currently assigned to the clock Click this button to assign all employees to the clock Employees selected are assigned the default Authority and Verification automatically NOTE If you use this method to choose employees you may want to Edit the employee in order to choose another Authority and Verification Click this button to select employees individually You will be prompted to select the following Authority The Authority Level defines which clock
48. Verification Level defines the false read threshold Configuring PC Clock Configuration of the PC Clock is done under the TA600 Series time clock The PC Clock can use entirely new clock configuration Configure a PC Clock 1 2 The General tab defines the communication and general operation settings Click the Communications menu Configure TA600 The Configure Clock dialog box will open The dialog box contains several tabs all of which are described below Configure TA600 Series Clocks PC PC Clock P PC Clock 7 General Configure Code FE Description PC Clock W Active y Communication Lan Path Direct R5232 z Baud rate 5600 gt Port Com 1 z SeralBaud 9600 LAN ID IT e Converter pps cD Time difference between computer and clock 0 x L nA Ethemet Division 0000 ABC Manufactoring y IP Address 1321501711 y Supervisor IP Port uo Prefix for entyy 17 Default date I Prefix for recall Default Time Modem l Baudrate 1200 gt r Input noe Employee badge Phone number Initial source source by supervisor Start stop answer 00 J00 2 00 00 IV Swipe M Swipe BB Alas fia IV Key T Key I Bar Code I Bar Code Number of retries 0 Apply OK Cancel Figure 174 Configure PC Clocks General Tab and contains the following information Setting Definition Code This is a required field Enter PC for this code
49. When all settings are complete click the OK button to advance to the next screen You will be returned to the Detail tab of the Configure Employee window Click Close to exit the Configure Employee dialog box Edit an Employee 1 2 3 Navigate to the Detail tab of the Configure Employee window Highlight the Employee you wish to edit from the list at the side of the screen Click the Edit button The Detail screen will become available for you to edit the selected Employee Edit the settings as described in the Configure Employee section January 2009 Time America Inc 157 TA100 Pro Manual 5 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Employee screen 6 Click Close to exit the Configure Employee dialog box January 2009 Time America Inc 158 TA100 Pro Manual Delete an Employee Deleting an employee deletes all of the data relating to that employee throughout the database including time records NOTE This can cause inaccurate reporting You cannot undo a delete 1 Navigate to the Detail tab of the Configure Employee window 2 Highlight the Employee you wish to delete from the list at the side of the screen 3 Click the Delete button You will be prompted xi 7 re you sure you want to delete Figure 130 Deletion Confirmation 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion 5 Click Close to exit the Configure Employees dialog box January 2009 Time America Inc 159
50. a worked holiday OT3 The overtime rate specified in OT3 on the Overtime dialog box is paid for a worked holiday Select a level to indicate the employee s wage multiplier for a secondary worked holiday Reg Regular wages are paid for a worked holiday OT1 The overtime rate specified in OT1 on the Overtime dialog box is paid for a worked holiday OT2 The overtime rate specified in OT2 on the Overtime dialog box is paid for a worked holiday OT3 The overtime rate specified in OT3 on the Overtime dialog box is paid for a worked holiday Check this option to disable the holiday pay rate at midnight Clear this check box to continue using the holiday pay rate specified until the employee punches Out 4 The Overtime tab defines the rules for calculating overtime and contains the following information January 2009 Time America Inc 48 TA100 Pro Manual Configure Policies 001 Standard Policy 001 Standard Policy E iforni General Holidays Overtime Differential Exceptions M Pay OT Overtime Cycle r Overtime Definition Weekly OT level Period Limit Multiplier Biweekly oTi 40 00 1 5000 C Semimonthly 0T2 8999 99 1 0000 C Monthly 073 3399 99 0000 jj Daly Overtime pay Duero Reset at A OT Level OTI 0T2 0T3 DayEnd Y Consecutive Days M Sunday oTi 1075 93 99 Gace IV Monday REG 8 00 99 39 M Tuesday REG z 99 59 99 99 M Wednesday
51. all Uncheck all Figure 74 Adding a new Security Level 3 Fill in the settings as described in the Configuring Security Levels section 4 Click OK to commit the changes and close the Security Level dialog box 5 Click Close to exit the Configure Security Level dialog box Edit a Security Level 1 Click the File menu Security Define Levels The Configure Security Levels dialog box will open O January 2009 Time America Inc 96 TA100 Pro Manual 2 Highlight the Security Level you wish to edit from the list at the side of the screen 3 Click the Edit button The tabs will become available for you to edit the selected Security Level NOTE You cannot edit the Code field 4 Edit the settings as described in the Configure Security Level section Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Security Level screen 6 Click Close to exit the Configure Security Level dialog box Delete a Security Level 1 Click the File menu Security Define Levels The Configure Security Levels dialog box will open 2 Highlight the Security Level you wish to delete from the list at the side of the screen 3 Click the Delete button You will be prompted Confirmation Q Are you sure you want to delete a Figure 75 Deletion Confirmation 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion 5 Click Close to exit the Configure Security Levels dialog box User Maintenance User Maintenance defines the users that can log i
52. and computer are in the same time zone Select the company division where the clock is located Every transaction entered on this clock is tagged with this division code Enter the badge number that activates the Supervisor mode of the clock 221 TA100 Pro Manual 3 The Policies tab defines the rounding lunch and break policies for the employees using this clock These are not the same as the company policies set up under the Configure menu but rather policies that are transferred to the clock when it is programmed Up to 15 different policies can be defined for the TASC terminal Any company policy that is not defined here is not downloaded to the TASC Configure TASC Series Clocks DListed Sho Inactive G Code Nere 3 Tasc Employee Diagnos Info Program Info POLICY NUMBER 0 Shift starts HH MM J Round forward to start MM Grace back to start MM Shift stops HH MM 2 Grace forward to stop MM ro Round back to stop MM E Lockout begins HH MM J Lockout ends HH MM P J r OUTSIDE ROUND IN MINUTES 7 p POLICIES l Daily OT HH MM Weekly OT HH MM Link back time HH MM 7 F Tip Punches T Lunch Punches T Pay Lunch Lunch duration MM Deduct lunch after HH MM Lunch Grace MM ae 2 8 Bw Lunch minimum MM Figure 177 Configure TASC Clock Policies tab Setting Definition Policies Displays a list of the 15 available policies Select the
53. and the number of editable pay periods settings For more information see Main Company page 28 and Configure Users page 97 Configure Employee 00001 Timecard Schedule Transactions Status Benefits Messages Wages Badges NMS Detail Washington Carol Start Stop _Department eg Unpaid Dolar 5 2 Active Division ALL bd 07 16 03 Wed WORK 07 00 16 00 1 8 00 la E 5 1 00 Eer 211 i E TAA WORK Tear 16 00 a 8 00 5 1 00 i i E ri 3 E 3 z 7 lt lt Prio Find Next gt gt 07 21 03 Mon WORK 08 00 15 30 1 7 50 a Navigation I 07 22 03 T 08 00 1 g 00001 Washington Carol buttons 00002 Baines Peter 00003 Anderson Frank 00004 Jones David 00005 Smith John Auto processing Show Schedule Forecasting Approve Pay Petiods back fo 2 8 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Pay Period I 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 oo 000 a 1 00 1 00 0 00 1 00 selector 5 Listed 0 00 Number C Name Y Show Inactives Figure 133 Online Timecard January 2009 Time America Inc 161 TA100 Pro Manual e Navigation buttons Click the Navigation buttons to scroll to previous and next pay periods The navigation button at the top of the scroll bar takes you to the previous pay period the button at the bottom takes you to the next pay period e Pay Period selector Use the spin button in the Pay Periods Back box t
54. at the side of the screen Click the Edit button The General screen will become available for you to edit the selected Bell Schedule Edit the settings as described in the Configure Bell Schedule section Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Bells screen Click Close to exit the Configure Bells dialog box Delete a Bell Schedule Bell Schedules that are in use cannot be deleted 1 Click the System Setup menu Bell Schedules The Configure Bells dialog box will open Highlight the Bell Schedule you wish to delete using the list at the side of the screen January 2009 Time America Inc 85 TA100 Pro Manual 3 Click the Delete button You will be prompted xi 2 Are you sure you want to delete Figure 66 Deletion Confirmation 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion 5 Click Close to exit the Configure Bell Schedules dialog box Security Security access determines who can log in to the TA100 Pro which employees they are allowed to manage and which areas of the program they are permitted to access Security is established in two steps 1 Create the Security Levels that specify which program features are accessible 2 Add User accounts Users are given a login id and password are assigned to a Security Level and are granted access to select groups of employees You may define an unlimited number of Security Levels and Users The number of users logged in at one time is limited
55. button to update the benefit calculations to the current day for this employee Details Click this button to display the individual accrual or entitlement transactions for this employee For more information see Benefit Accruals page 105 Benefit Accruals Update Employee Benefits TA100 Pro will automatically update employee benefit accruals to the current day However if you make a change the Benefit Accrual rule assigned to the employee or change the settings of the rule you may wish to force TA100 Pro to update 1 Navigate to the Benefits tab of the Configure Employee window See Benefit Accruals Configure page 140 2 Click the Update button This employee s benefits will update and the screen will refresh Benefit Accruals Employee Benefit Details It is possible to view a detailed schedule of how much benefit time the employee has earned and when it was posted 1 Navigate to the Benefits tab of the Configure Employee window See Benefit Accruals Configure page 140 2 Click the Details button The Benefit Details screen will display p AAA Benefit Details for Washington Carol 00001 AC zz Day Date Time Amount Balance Category Type Archived Sun 02 26 2001 16 07 95 UAC Hours di c Thu 08 23 2001 00 00 02 VAC Misc Entry NO Wed 08 22 2001 00 00 02 8 000000 104 000000 VAC Misc Entry NO Tue 08 21 2001 00 00 02 8 000000 112 000000 VAC Misc Entry NO Mon 01 01 2001 00 00 01 120 000000 120 00000
56. by double clicking it and choosing the desired settings in the Report Parameter Window Once set these parameters can be changed at any time by clicking the Report Options button Select this option to schedule an event that will Reindex all the system databases This Event must be scheduled at a time when it is most likely that all users will be logged out If another user is logged into the system this Event will be skipped The items that display in this list depend upon the type of AutoProcess chosen For example if Poll Clocks is selected this list will display all the clocks configured in the program To select a single item double click the item to tag it Click the Tag All button to select all items Enter the time at which you want the process to occur Select the days of the week you want the process to occur 242 TA100 Pro Manual Tag All Untag All Click the Tag All button to select all the items in the list Click Untag All to deselect all the items in the list Poll Clocks AutoProcess 1 If Poll Clocks is selected select the clock s you wish to poll with this process by double clicking each clock to tag it If Poll Clocks is selected click the Polling Options button to configure the settings for polling The Polling Options dialog box will open Polling Options x T Set clocks date and time T Program clocks T Load Bell schedules E Load Access control table E Load Profile
57. by the number of User Licenses installed There are four commands within the Security menu all of which are described in the following sections TA100 Pro Time America Inc Daily Operations Reports System Setup Communications Help 16 User Maintenance dh R Define Levels 3 Export Who s Logged in P Utilities Change Password dy Print Environment ity Import wg Login New User Exit ALT F4 Figure 67 Security Menu January 2009 Time America Inc 86 TA100 Pro Manual Configure Security Levels Security Levels define which areas of the program are accessible and what can be done in them Security Levels should be configured prior to adding Users Examples of Security Levels are e Branch Managers e Line Supervisors e Payroll HR Up to four options are available for each feature As the function of these options is the same for each feature they are described once here for ease of use Option Definition View Grants read only access to items Add Allows the user to add new items Edit Allows the user to edit existing items Delete Allows the user to delete existing items 1 Click the File menu Security Define Levels The Configure Security Levels window will open Configure Security Leyels Mena Code Name Y Active Set Date and Time Z Print Lists A File Daily Operations Reports System Setup Communicat
58. bypass the automatic assignment and be allowed to enter the badge number manually Choose Next Numeric Available to have TA100 Pro assign the next sequential available badge number Choose Same as Employee Numberto have TA100 Pro assign a badge number that is identical to the employee s ID number 7 When all settings are complete click the Exports tab to select it The Exports screen will appear Configure Main Company General Configure Defaults Exports Please select the payroll package that your company exports to y Selected Export PrimePay Click the button below to display PrimePay as your only export in the Reports gt Exports menu Display only this export Pine J OK J _ Carcel Figure 28 Main Company Exports Tab 8 Select the payroll provider to which you wish to export data You may be prompted for additional information specific to the payroll application selected For example when ADP is selected you are asked for the Company Code of your main company Click Display only this export to have this payroll company listed as the only export available via reports NOTE If the payroll provider you will be using does not appear in the list simply choose either Generic Numeric or Generic Alpha depending on the Pay Code type your provider requires contact your payroll provider to obtain this information 9 When all settings are complete click OK to save the changes and exit t
59. code name can be up to 30 characters long Start These settings define the rounding rules for the period s start time Depending upon the type of transaction selected this may be the In Start Lunch or Start Break punch Round In Identifies the number of minutes before the scheduled Start time that will round forward to the scheduled In time Grace In Identifies the number of minutes that are rounded back after the scheduled start time Dock In Identifies the number of minutes after the scheduled Start time that will be rounded forward before TA100 Pro will use the Outside Round Outside Round The Outside Round box is for additional rounding rules not covered in the ranges above Both the Start and Stop category has its own set of outside rounding parameters O January 2009 Time America Inc 59 TA100 Pro Manual Every XX mins With A XX Minute Split Stop Dock Out Grace Out Round Out Outside Round Every XX mins With A XX Minute Split O January 2009 Time America Inc Rounding may be minute to minute 0 or in set increments of 3 6 15 30 or 60 minutes Click the arrow to display valid entries then select the increment desired For example entering 15 in this field means that for punches occurring outside the Scheduled Start time round to the nearest 15 minutes using the Round Back and Round Forward rules specified below Punches occurring through the minute specified will round back to the la
60. costing information for that slice of time Blue backgrounds have been added in the employee screen for easier visibility of an active feature January 2009 Time America Inc 160 TA100 Pro Manual Accessing the Online Timecard from the Approval Editor 1 Click the Daily Operations menu Approval Editor or click on the E The Approval Editor dialog box will open 2 Double click an employee s name to open to the Online Timecard window Date ay Cat M 02 19 02 Tue D6 54 02 19 02 Tue WORK 10 06 10 06 e 02 20 02 Wed WORK 06 53 IR 11 53 4 88 02 20 02 Wed WORK 11 53 15 53 0D 2 87 1 00 02 21 02 Thu WORK 07 01 15 58 06 8 00 1 00 02 22 02 Fri WORK 06 56 15 55 0D 7 75 1 00 M 02 25 02 Mon 15 56 E 02 26 02 Tue WORK 07 06 ID 15 58 0G 7 75 1 00 02 27 02 Wed WORK 06 59 16 05 8 00 1 00 M 02 28 02 Thu 06 55 z A 03 01 02 Fri 0370172002 Totals z Pay Period 02 18 2002 to 03 03 2002 Totals 46 75 0 00 0 00 0 00 6 00 Pay Periods back 0 z IV Auto processing T Show Schedule From Schedule Reprocess Add Trans Edit Add Start EditAdd Stop Delete Close Figure 132 Online Timecard Approval Editor Navigating in the Online Timecard Tab By default the Online Timecard screen displays the current pay period s data There are two easy techniques for navigating to other pay periods NOTE It may not be possible to edit data in previous pay periods depending upon your security permissions
61. deletion and return to the Status screen January 2009 Time America Inc 136 TA100 Pro Manual Employee Benefits Tab The Benefits tab reflects the selected employee s current benefit balances The information and options on this tab will be slightly different if you have purchased Benefit Accruals than with Benefit Entitlement Both options are described below Benefit Entitlement is first followed by Benefit Accruals Benefit Entitlement Configure 1 page 119 Navigate to the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee 2 Click the Benefits tab to display the following information 00001 Timecard Schedule Transactions Status Bl Messages Wages Badges mM Detail Washington Carol Active Template Division ALL z Group ALL X P Find Next gt gt 00001 Washington Carol 00002 Baines Peter 00003 Anderson Frank 00004 Jones David 00005 Smith John 5 Listed Number C Name I Show Inactives Fiscal Date 11 22 2002 Hire Date 11 22 2000 758 Days of Service Code Description Allowed Taken Pending Left Count Cary date ce o0 ooo 000 40 00 0 00 0 00 SICK SICK PAID f Li vac VACATION o 11 22 2002 Update Details Print Close Figure 107 Configure Employee Benefits tab Setting Definition Fiscal Date Displays the employee s Fiscal Date set on the Detail tab for information purposes Hire Date Displays the employee s Hire Da
62. dialog box allows you to further filter and group report data Fill in the settings as appropriate Setting Status Full Time Part Time Both Permanent Temporary Both Hourly Salary Sort By Group By January 2009 Time America Inc Definition These settings allow you filter which employees data will be printed Check Full Time to print only employees whose Status is Part Time Check Part Time to print only employees whose Status is Full Time Check Both to print both Full Time and Part Time employees Check Permanent to print only employees whose Status is Permanent Check Temporary to print only employees whose Status is Temporary Check Both to print both Permanent and Temporary employees Check Hourly to print only employees whose Status is Hourly Check Salary to print only employees whose Status is Salary Check Both to print both Hourly and Salary employees Select the setting by which you want employee records to sort The options are Number Employee ID Number or Name Select the setting by which you want employee records to group organize The options are None Department Division and Group 192 TA100 Pro Manual Output to Select the media to which you wish to output the report The options are Screen The report will preview on screen You are then able to print from the preview Printer The report will be sent directly to the printer File The report can be c
63. dialog box will appear if you are deleting a line in the Timecard that has both a Start and a Stop xi This dialog box will appear if you 7 Are you sure you want to delete are deleting a single Start or Stop from either the Timecard or the Transactions Audit Trails TA100 Pro keeps track of the changes that are made to time entries This feature is known as an Audit Trail The Transactions tab of the Configure Employee dialog box displays the changes made to a transaction the date the change was made and the name and number of the person who made the change This information can be printed for reporting purposes 1 Navigate to the Transactions tab of the Configure Employee window and select the employee you wish to view Highlight the transaction for which you wish to see the Audit Trail The Audit Trail section of the screen contains the following SUPERVISOR 1111111111 OPERATOR SYSTEM Date 08 27 2001 Time 11 00 05 Figure 140 Audit Trail Setting Definition Supervisor Displays the name and number of the supervisor who edited this transaction Supervisor Badge Displays the badge number associated with the Supervisor who made the edit Date Displays the Date on which the edit was made Time Displays the Time at which the edit was made O January 2009 Time America Inc 170 TA100 Pro Manual Print the Audit Trails TA100 Pro tracks all changes that are made to time entries You may print this Au
64. dollars in the next field Select Subtract to deduct the number of hours or dollars in the next field If an Hours category was selected this field will become available Enter the number of hours for this transaction in decimal format If a Dollars category was selected this field will become available Enter the amount of dollars for this transaction If an Hours category was selected this field will automatically fill in when enter the HH MM in the previous field 165 TA100 Pro Manual REG OT1 0T2 OT3 Select the rate at which the Miscellaneous time should be paid Accrue towards Check this box to cause the Miscellaneous Overtime entry to count toward overtime daily and weekly Differential Select the differential at which the Miscellaneous time should be paid Level Check this option to have TA100 Pro override the Job Costing level s Prompt This section will become available if a function requiring additional input is selected for example Enter a Department Input Enter the additional input for example the Department number 5 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Online Timecard Edit a Transaction This section describes how to use the Edit button in the Transaction tab You can edit transactions from either the Online Timecard or the Transactions tab of the Configure Employee dialog box The Online Timecard provides two buttons Edit Add Start and Edit Add Stop which are described in
65. format If the lockout begin and lockout end times are 00 00 no lockout takes place The default is 00 00 Any employee that enters a punch between these lockout times receives the message SEE SUPERVISOR Only by swiping a supervisor badge can you override the lockout and accept the punch Enter the stop time HH MM of this policy s employee lockout Enter the time in military format If the lockout begin and lockout end times are both 00 00 no lockout takes place The default is 00 00 or not used Any employee that enters a punch between these lockout times receives the message SEE SUPERVISOR Only by swiping a supervisor badge can you override the lockout and accept the punch Enter the increment to which punches that fall outside of the rounding to schedule should round For example if 6 is selected in this field time is rounded to the nearest 6 minutes Punches between 0 and 3 minutes are rounded back to the last increment punches between 4 and 6 minutes are rounded forward to the next increment The default is 15 Enter the length of time HH MM an employee has to work in one day before overtime is applied For example if 8 00 is entered in this field any hours worked over 8 hours a day is counted as overtime The default is 00 00 Enter the length of time HH MM an employee has to work in one week before overtime is applied For example if 40 00 is entered in this field any hours worked over 40 hours a week is
66. frame s in Shift Maintenance 52 TA100 Pro Manual 6 The Exceptions tab defines rules for flagging hours worked exceptions and contains the following information Configure Policies Settin Report Exceptions Consecutive hours worked Overtime hours worked Daily hours worked Period hours worked O January 2009 Time America Inc 001 Standard Policy lif General Holidays Overtime Differential I Report exceptions Consecutive hours worked Overtime hours worked 3 T of o a el o S a tol col a S S Daily hours worked Period hours worked 5 S co Era Er co Er toy ox Cancel Figure 40 Policies Exceptions tab Definition Check this box for TA100 Pro to report employees that work above or below the specified parameters Enter the number of consecutive hours worked HH MM that if exceeded by an employee will be reported on the Consecutive Hours Exception report For example if 14 00 is entered employees working over 14 consecutive hours are flagged for the report Enter the number of overtime hours HH MM that if exceeded by an employee will be reported on the Overtime Hours Exception report For example if 20 00 is entered any employees working over 20 hours of overtime are flagged for the report An employee who works under or over this number of hours HH MM per day is reported on the Daily Hours Except
67. is Job Length Enter the maximum number of digits for the Job ID Type Choose the data type for the Job ID The options are Numeric and Alphanumeric User Defined Fields TA100 Pro allows you to define up to six user defined fields Enter the names of the fields you would like to define if any If you do not need any custom fields you may leave these blank The default values are License Spouse and License 2 but you may modify or delete these as desired Badges Length Enter the number of characters from 2 to 10 that will be read from the employee badge For example if the badge number is 10 characters long but you want to read only the last five characters enter a 5 in this field The number of digits here must match the actual number of digits on the physical badges given to employees and must also match the settings programmed into the badge reader clocks Maximum Type the maximum number of characters from 2 to 64 on an employee s badge Any badge longer than this number will be rejected by the time clock Type Choose the data type for the Badge number The options are Numeric and Alphanumeric Most though not all badges will be Numeric January 2009 Time America Inc 32 TA100 Pro Manual Automatic Badge TA100 Pro can assign badge numbers Assignment automatically when adding a new employee You can manually change automatic assignments later if necessary Choose No Automatic Assignment to
68. is undefined Click this key to punch In from Break Click this key to punch In Click this key to enter the Department transfer Click this key to punch Out Click this key to Clear the transaction Click this key to backspace one character Confirms an entry Click this button Close PC Clock 1 Navigate to PC Clock a FON Default Clock Out Enter Badge number Click the Enter key Click the In key Click OK to confirm transaction 1 Navigate to PC Clock Po N January 2009 Time America Inc Enter Badge number Click the Enter key Click the Out key 117 TA100 Pro Manual 5 Click OK to confirm transaction Default Clock Out for Lunch 1 Dapy Navigate to PC Clock Enter Badge number Click the Enter key Click the 4 key Click the Enter key Click OK to confirm transaction Default Clock In from Lunch gi FON Navigate to PC Clock Enter Badge number Click the Enter key Click the 6 key Click OK to confirm transaction Default Transfer Department 1 NO 7 BR wo LV Navigate to PC Clock Enter Badge number Click the Enter key Click the 0 key Enter the Department number Click the Enter key Click OK to confirm transaction January 2009 Time America Inc 118 TA100 Pro Manual Chapter VIl Employee Maintenance This section covers the concepts and tasks for managing employee information It includes information on adding e
69. menus employee can view or use at the clock The following options are available Employee Supervisor or Configuration Verification The Verification Level defines the false read threshold 207 TA100 Pro Manual TA715 TA777 and TA780 Series Configuration of the TA715 Series TA777 Series and TA780 Series time clocks is virtually identical For this reason they are combined into one section Since multiple clocks can be defined in the TA100 Pro a copy feature is available to copy an existing clock s parameters when adding a new clock This eliminates the need to re enter an entirely new clock configuration Configure a TA715 TA777 TA780 Series Clock 1 Click the Communications menu Configure TA715 or TA777 or TA780 The Configure Clock dialog box will open The dialog box contains several tabs all of which are described below Configure TA777 Series Clocks 004 General Configure TA Code Description TA777 v Active A Communication Lan Path Direct RS232 v Baud rate Port COM1 w SerialBaud 19200 v LANID 0 Misc Time difference between computer and clock 0 Division 0000 TIME AMERICA INC Ethemet IP Address Supervisor IP Port Default date Default Time Modem Baud rate Input Employee badge Phone number Initial source source by supervisor Start stop answer H i v Swipe or Prox 2 Swipe or Prox Ring delay Mi Key Key 1
70. message with a custom message up to 16 characters in length An INVALID BADGE message displays when a badge or card other than the specified badge length is used This field allows you to replace the default INVALID LEVEL message with a custom message This message is displayed when Validation is used and an invalid level number is entered It cannot be more than 16 characters January 2009 Time America Inc 204 TA100 Pro Manual Idle Message Enter the message text that displays on the time clock when in an idle state If this field is left blank no message will be displayed It can accept a one line message that is up to 16 characters Idle Display sec Enter the length of time from 1 to 60 seconds that the idle message displays before switching to the date and time The default is 2 0 indicates the idle message should not display Date Time display Enter the length of time from 1 to 60 sec seconds that the Date and time display before switching back to the idle message The default is 2 0 indicates the date and time should not display Swipe amp Go Badges f the Swipe amp Go feature is used enter the highest badge number that the terminal will recognize as a Swipe amp Go badge For example if 2000 is entered here only badge numbers 0001 through 2000 are considered Swipe amp Go badges All badge numbers above 2000 are treated as normal badges requiring the employee to enter a funct
71. must configure this section Enter the number of hours that need to elapse before a Lunch or Break is automatically deducted For example if three hours must elapse enter 03 00 in this field Click the button to the left of the From field and select whether the elapsed time starts from the Actual In Punch or Shift Start Time The word Punch or Shift displays in this field to indicate your selection Enter the time to be automatically deducted for the Lunch or Break For example to deduct one hour enter 01 00 63 TA100 Pro Manual Punched Duration Pay Outside These settings define how long the employee is allowed for lunch and how payment should be handled if the employee takes more time than is allowed If the employee punches Out for and In from lunches or breaks enter the duration of the lunch or break in this field For example to specify a one hour lunch period enter 01 00 If the employee punches Out for and In from lunch select the Pay Outside check box to authorize payment for any time taken outside the specified window of time 5 The Differential tab defines a Shift Differential for this Shift Group not for the individual Shift and contains the following information 4 Listed C Code Name T Show Inactives onfigure Shifts 001 Groups Details Standard Shift 2 Start Gto s M d Fr anda nda ieda Esda usd Frida urda L aturda Tt Add Ed Dae Print Close Figure 47
72. necessary because the Hand Reader clocks take measurements of an employee s hand and the TA7000 clocks can be used as fingerprint clocks Each time the employee punches the clocks compare the employee s hand and or fingerprint to the existing template Employee information hand templates and fingerprints are stored in the clocks For this reason employees must be assigned to a clock so their name and template will be downloaded to the correct clock Configure Hand Readers 1 Navigate to the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee page 119 2 Click the Clocks tab to display the following information O January 2009 Time America Inc 152 TA100 Pro Manual Configure Employee 00003 Timecard Schedule Transactions Status Benefits Messages Wages Badges Anderson Frank Active O Baines Peter 00002 Jones David 00004 Smith John 00005 Washington Carol 00001 Hand Reader ES 5 Listed O Number Name V Show Inactives Clock ID Templates on file for badge numbers Ne Clocks Detail TA7000 Badge TimeZone Reject Authority A Retrieve templates from Figure 126 Configure Employee Readers tab Settin Clock ID Badge Time Zone Reject Authority Templates on file for Badge Numbers Retrieve Templates From All Clocks Add Edit Delete January 2009 Time America Inc Definition Displays the Clock ID assigned to each reader
73. new Bell Schedule The General tab will become available Configure Bells General Number fiir Name W Active DAY OF WEEK r SCHEDULES SMTUTFS Time Duration Figure 64 Adding a new Bell Schedule Enter in the Number Name and Active status NOTE As soon as the Number is entered the Add button in the center of the screen will become available Click the Add button in the center of the screen to add the individual bell details The Bell Details window will open O January 2009 Time America Inc 84 TA100 Pro Manual 8 9 10 11 T Wednesday T Thursday I Friday T Saturday Time 00 00 Duration 2 0 OK Cancel OListed CO iumbe 6 Neme I Show Inactive Figure 65 Bell Schedules Bell Details Select the days of the week you want the bell to ring Enter the time HH MM at which you want the bell to ring This must be entered in military time Enter the duration for the bell how long the bell should ring The default value is 2 0 seconds Click OK to commit the changes and close the Bell Details dialog box Repeat Steps 4 through 8 to add all the Bell Details for this schedule Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Bells screen Click Close to exit the Configure Bells dialog box Edit a Bell Schedule 1 Click the System Setup menu Bell Schedules The Configure Bells dialog box will open Highlight the Bell Schedule you wish to edit from the list
74. not compress data but stores it all in one file If Drive A or B are selected these settings will become available TA100 Pro will format the floppy drive prior to copying the archived file onto it Choose the method of formatting desired The options are Quick Deletes all information on the drive without formatting Conditional Saves the table that is on the disk Unconditional Deletes everything on the disk and reformats Low Density Formats a low density disk which almost never heard of anymore and should only be used by knowledgeable users Select this option if TA100 Pro should split a large archive file so that it can be spanned over more than one floppy disk You will be prompted to insert disks as needed Select this option to have new archive information add to an existing archive file of the same name Select this option to have new archive information overwrite an existing archive file of the same name If append to file is selected you will need to decide how duplicate records should be handled Select this option to overwrite existing duplicate records with new information 261 TA100 Pro Manual Discard Records Select this option to discard the new duplicate records and keep the existing records 3 Click OK to complete the Archive Restore Archive Archived data is data that has been removed from the TA100 Pro software but has not been deleted The only information that is stored in a
75. policy you wish to configure Shift Starts HH MM Enter the time of day HH MM the shift starts for employees Enter the time in military format The default is 08 00 or 8 00 A M Round forward to Enter the number of minutes before the start MM shift s start time that punches are rounded Grace back to start MM Shift Stops HH MM Grace forward to stop MM Round back to stop MM January 2009 Time America Inc forward to the shift s start A maximum of 99 minutes may be entered The default is 30 minutes Enter the number of minutes after the shift s start time that punches are rounded back in grace to the shift s start A maximum of 99 minutes may be entered The default is 5 minutes Enter the time of day HH MM the shift ends for employees Enter the time in military format The default is 17 00 or 5 00 P M Enter the number of minutes before the shift s stop time that punches are rounded forward to the shift s stop A maximum of 99 minutes may be entered The default is 5 minutes Enter the number of minutes after the shift s stop time that punches are rounded back to the shift s stop A maximum of 99 minutes may be entered The default is 30 minutes 222 TA100 Pro Manual Lockout begins HH MM Lockout ends HH MM Outside Round in Minutes Daily OT Weekly OT O January 2009 Time America Inc Enter the start time HH MM of this policy s employee lockout Enter the time in military
76. r Pefiles sl Ok Close Figure 210 Purge R Files 2 Select the file you wish to purge by double clicking it to tag it Or select all files by clicking the Tag All button 3 Click OK to purge the files Post Historical Data Posting Historical Data allows you to move historical information to another location where it can still be accessed for reports but where it is not slowing down the performance of the program You must also Post Historical Data prior to Archiving it See Archive page 260 TA100 Pro keeps track of a large amount of information As the number of employees goes up the amount of data that pertains to those employees goes up After awhile the amount of data that needs to be processed will noticeably slow down the computer TA100 Pro allows a user to decide when past transactions will no longer be needed for editing and saves the processed punches to another file The transactions in this new file cannot be edited in any way Posted transactions will appear in reports but will not appear in online timecards or transactions screens If the transactions do need to be edited they will need to be unposted The difference between posting data and archiving data is posted data will appear on reports archived data will not Data cannot be archived until it has been posted 1 Click the File menu Utilities Post Historical Data The Post Historical Data dialog box will open Post Historical Data
77. s access rights to Bell Schedule settings The options are View Add Edit and Delete For more information on this feature see Bell Schedules page 114 7 The Communication tab grants access to features under the Communications menu and contains the following information Configure Security Levels SUPERVISOR Codi N SUPERVISOR LEVEL 511 lame TC SUPERVISOR Y Active Set Date and Time Print Lists A File Daily Operations Reports System Setup Communication Poll Auto Process Confiqure View Start View Add Edit Del Schedule Start Set Date and Time 1 Listed Figure 73 Security Levels Communication tab Setting Definition Poll This section defines the user s access rights to Poll hardware clocks Start Allows the user to start the process of polling clocks For more information on this feature see Polling page 238 Change Allows the user to manually change the times Selections at which the clocks poll For more information on this feature see Polling page 238 Options Allows the user to change the settings in the Poll Clock Selection dialog box For more information on this feature see Polling page 238 AutoProcess This section defines the user s access rights to configure Auto Processes For more information on this feature see Configure an AutoProcess page 240 O January 2009 Time America Inc 95
78. sschetsedi gssaseitts earainn rais e ee asas Ea EEE ip idad cidade 154 EMPLOYEE DETAILS TAB ccccccccececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececeseeenens 155 Configure Employee Details coincida dietas iia db acid 155 Add an Employee iii nicas nido la dado dans dance iii eia Seea decasesadesoopebensbentasedbipsbdesuasesncbubeadeapsaseanuacneedsene 156 Edit an Employee a idad iaa ds biie 157 Delete an FMployee noni ii iia da ea aosd araia ea ioari as ias ascii 159 CHAPTER VII TIMECARD AND TRANSACTION MAINTENANCE u1 ccsscccssssscccsscscccsssccccssseccesssseces 160 ONLINE TIMECARD ds 160 Accessing the Online Timecard from the Configure Employee Screen oooncioccconnconnonnnoncnnncnnn cono cnno rn nora nonanonn non 160 Accessing the Online Timecard from the Approval EditOF oonnoninnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnn anno cono cnn con no rn nora nora non nono 161 NAVIGATING IN THE ONLINE TIMECARD TAB cccccecececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececeeseeceeecececs 161 NAVIGATING IN THE TRANSACTIONS TAB ccccccececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececess 162 ADDING AND EDITING TRANSACTIONS ccccccecececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececeeecececs 162 AG EAS a NAE ERA POE EAE SETAA EASTEN ENEA EAE EATE T AT E ORAE 163 Add Mis
79. tables E Load Level Validation T Load Messages Tl Process punches after polling Hand Reader TF Send Hand Templates to Reader T Clear Templates in Hand Reader TF Retrieve Hand Templates from Reader OK Cancel Figure 191 Polling Options 3 Check the options that are appropriate Setting Poll Transactions Clear Clock Transactions Set Clock Date and Time O January 2009 Time America Inc Definition Check this option to transfer punches from the clock to TA100 Pro Check this option to clear the transactions from the clock after transferring them to TA100 Pro TIP This does not need to be done every time You may leave the transactions in the clock until payroll is processed successfully however if you have a lot of employees you will want to clear more frequently so the clock memory does nat fill up Check this option to send the computer s current date and time to the clock TIP You may not want to do this every time as the clock s internal clock tends to be much more accurate that the computer s 243 TA100 Pro Manual Program Clock Check this option to send programming and configuration information such as the settings in the Configure Clock dialog box to the clock Clock function keys and function messages are sent to the clock during programming This option should only be used when basic clock setup has been changed since the initial programming Load Bell Check
80. the File menu Allows the employee to import data from external files For more information on this feature see Importing page 247 Allows the employee to export data from TA100 Pro to an external file For more information on this feature see Exporting page 249 89 TA100 Pro Manual Print Setup Allows the employee access to the print setup information from the File menu See page 182 4 The Daily Operations tab grants access to features under the Daily Operations menu and contains the following information Configure Security Levels SUPERVISOR SUPERVISOR LEVEL fade TE Name TC SUPERVISOR Y Active SetDate and Time LC Print Lists A File Daly Operations Reports System Setup Communication View Add Edit Delete View Add Edit Delete Approval Editor Messages Employee Wages Badges Timecard Approve Timecard Clocks Status Board Schedule LJ Task Organizer LU Allow Schedule Override Global Transactions Benefit Accruals Status v Benefits 1 Listed Figure 70 Security Levels Daily Operations tab Setting Definition Approval Editor Defines the user s access rights to the Approval Editor The options are View and Edit For more information on this feature see Approval Editor page 172 Employee Defines the user s access rights to the Confi
81. the Post to benefit entitlement box For more information see Categories page 37 Select how often you want benefits to be posted The options are e Weekly e Biweekly e Semimonthly e Monthly e Annually e Daily The benefits are posted at the end of the posting period Pick the date for the policy to take effect Pick a date in the past so that the defined rules can be met for all current employees This date indicates the rollover or reset date for employee benefits The options are e Hire this benefit resets on the employee s individual hire date set in Employee Maintenance e Fiscal this benefit resets on the employee s individual fiscal date set in Employee Maintenance e Other this benefit resets on this date for all employees For example January 1 This setting enables you to grant a lump sum benefit a certain number of months from the employees hire date For example Give 40 hours after 6 months from hire date to automatically give an employee a week s vacation on his her six month anniversary This setting will not grant employee hours if the employee status is inactive 108 TA100 Pro Manual Accumulator Details Year Month One Time Straight Given Hours at end Hours from Categories to sum X Minimum Hours Needed O January 2009 Time America Inc This section displays the details for accumulating or accruing the category selected There can be multiple accumulat
82. the settings as appropriate Settin Shift Start Stop Override Graphic Override O January 2009 Time America Inc Definition Select a pre defined Shift for this employee Enter the start and stop schedule change time for rounding rule purposes only Use the graphic timeline to define the start and stop schedule change time for rounding rule purposes only 127 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Definition Work Check this box to indicate whether or not the employee is scheduled to work that day and how many paid hours are forecasted Department Select a pre defined Department for this employee Optional Job Select a pre defined Job for this employee Optional Update Rest of Check this box to update the rest of the current week Week with these settings Recommended 7 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Schedule screen The Shift and Department information selected will display NOTE TA100 Pro automatically keeps the schedule current for three months into the future so you needn t update manually unless you are making a change that should apply to dates that have already been updated 8 Check the Work box of each day of the week the employee is scheduled to work 9 If you are editing the schedule and wish these changes to apply into the future click the Update Forward box or Update Back box 10 Click Apply to save the changes and update Forward if selected for editing Delete a Sch
83. this option to send pre defined Bell Schedules Schedule assigned to the clock Bell schedules are only checked at midnight so a bell will not ring on the same day the bell schedule was downloaded The Bell Module must be installed to use this option NOTE This is not recommended with the TA520 or TA530 as the clock needs to roll past midnight for the bell schedule to take effect Load Messages Check this option to send employee messages to the clock Hand Reader These settings only apply to the Hand Reader clocks The options are Send Hand Templates Select this option to send employee hand templates to the clock This can be used to upload a template to a new clock or to restore templates to a clock that has been cleared Clear Templates Check this option to clear the templates from the clock USE THIS OPTION VERY CAREFULLY as it will delete all existing templates in the clock and employees will not be able to punch until the templates are restored Retrieve Hand Templates Check this option to download new hand templates from the clock for input into the TA100 Pro database Process Punches Check this option to automatically put the after polling punches into the online timecards of the employees 4 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Auto Process Maintenance screen 5 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Auto Process Screen 6 Click Start to activate the Auto Process sch
84. time in military format TRANSACTION PRINT F Print transactions as they occur Header line 1 Header line 2 T Download Bell Schedule o bell y tony ok ca Figure 175 Configure PC Clock Configure Tab Setting Time Outs For data input O January 2009 Time America Inc Definition These settings determine how long prompts and messages will appear on the clock s screen Enter the length of time from 0 1 to 99 9 seconds the clock will wait for a response to a prompt before returning to an idle state Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a second For example 10 0 means that the clock will wait 10 seconds for a response after prompting for input The default is 60 0 seconds 217 TA100 Pro Manual To Enter function Displayed messages Supervisor questions Error messages Messages Enter Function TASC Enter the length of time from 0 1 to 99 9 seconds the clock will wait for a response to enter a function before returning to an idle state Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a second For example 5 5 means that the clock will wait 5 2 seconds for a response after prompting for input The default is 20 0 seconds Enter the length of time from 0 1 to 99 9 seconds the clock will display any message before returning to an idle state Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a second For example 1 5 means that the clock will display messages for 112 seconds The default
85. to edit the Shift Group Using the drop down arrow select the Rounding Rule you wish to edit Click the Edit In Out Rounding Edit Lunch Rounding or Edit Break Rounding button The Rounding Details dialog box will open for you to edit the selected Rounding Rule Edit the settings as described in the Configure Shift Group section Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Rounding Details dialog box 7 Click Close to exit the Configure Shift Group dialog box January 2009 Time America Inc 68 TA100 Pro Manual Holidays The Holiday feature specifies which dates are considered company holidays How employees are paid for the holidays is defined within Policies section Holidays must be defined in order to post employee time toward a paid holiday rather than time worked as well as to generate time and attendance reports that reflect holidays It is necessary to define the holidays each year as certain holidays fall on or are observed on different dates each year Holiday Tips e Itis not necessary to define all annual holidays only enter those holidays that your company recognizes e f a holiday falls on a Sunday but your employees get Monday off enter the holiday using Monday s date e If a holiday falls on a weekend and your employees do not receive holiday hours for that day then don t enter the holiday in the system e f your employees get two consecutive days off for a holiday you must enter both
86. types TA100 Pro Import supports are e Framework Il FW2 e Microsoft Multiplan 4 01 MOD e Paradox 3 5 4 0 DB e Rapidfile RPD e Lotus 123 versions 1 through 3 WKS WK1 WK3 e Symphony version 1 through 1 2 WRK WR1 e Microsoft Excel XLS e Comma Delimited e Tab Delimited e Space Delimited e System Data Format SDF e Symbolic Link Format SYLK e Data Interchange Format DIF e FoxPro January 2009 Time America Inc 247 TA100 Pro Manual 1 Click the File menu Import Advanced The Configure Import dialog box will open TYPE Delimited with Commas ial Import file Append to Ok Cancel Figure 194 Configure Import 2 Select the type of file to be imported 3 Click the Import File button to select the file that contains the information to be imported The Open dialog box will open Open zixl Look in lt a GENPRO v e c En LJ ARCHIVE LJ IMAGES LJ RESOURCE FINDCLK E CI BACKGRND ue Eatscommp exe ssi FIX XI BACKUP CI NEWDBFS F BAR39 TTF JFKPARSE E cK CI PDFDRYR F comms EXE ME FKPARSE 1 DBFS RAINBOW sa CONFIG FPW A FOXFONT CI REPORTS 32 Dealer32 EXE T FOXPRINT y Import Version Files of type fal Files y Cancel Help Code Page Figure 195 Open File 4 Navigate to and select the file you wish to import The file must be of one of the types listed at the beginning of the Import section Click the Select button to comm
87. without ESC saving the data Display the Help topic associated with the F1 current window Display the Calculator F2 Display the Calendar Diary F3 Display the Help gt About menu window F9 Display Conversion Table F12 Activate the menu bar in the Main Window F10 or ALT Exit the TA100 Pro system ALT F4 Display Rounded Start and Stop times inthe R Online Timecard O January 2009 Time America Inc 22 TA100 Pro Manual Help TA100 Pro incorporates an Online Help system to answer questions about functions procedures and commands You can access context sensitive Help from anywhere in the application by pressing the F1 function key You will automatically be taken to the Help topic appropriate for the screen that you are in currently You may also access the Online Help feature through the Help menu from which you can perform searches and browse the Help topics There are three ways you can look for information Browse the Contents Search the Index or do a text Find There are three tabs across the top of the Help Topics window to access each of these methods Access the Online Help Window Click the Help menu Help The Help Topics window will open DOR E TA100Pro Help Ez amp f Hide Print Options Contents Index Search 5 Daily Operations Menu Reports Menu o SystemSetup Menu Communications Menu Help Menu General Figure 19 Use Help Contents
88. 0 Pro recalculate the data If TA100 Pro had to recalculate data every time a user opened an employee timecard the usefulness of the program would be offset by the amount of time needed for the calculations Time is saved by allowing a user to make all necessary changes before reprocessing the data which is the driving reason behind having automated timekeeping software This utility does not actually reprocess the punches It allows a user to decide how far back and for whom the system will process punches After changing this setting you will need to manually reprocess at which time the system will reprocess back to the date entered here for the employees selected 1 Click the File menu Utilities Set Reprocess Date The Reprocess Punches dialog box will open Reprocess Punches 3 A Wed Reprocess punches starting on 11 Available 0 Selected Gk Cancel Figure 207 Reprocess Punches Remove H JOHN 000 WASHINGTON CAROL 00001 Remove al January 2009 Time America Inc 256 TA100 Pro Manual Enter the Reprocess date Select the employees for whom you wish to reprocess by using the Add button to select an individual employee or Add All to select all Click OK to complete the change Reprocess punches This can be accomplished by clicking the Reprocess button in the Online Timecard See Online Timecard page 160 Or by running a report with the Reprocess button selected Fix Unassigned Badges Emp
89. 0 VAC Bonus Hours NO Y Show Accrued Adjustments Print Delete Manual Adj Close Figure 112 Benefit Details 3 The Benefit Details dialog box contains the following information O January 2009 Time America In A TA100 Pro Manual Setting Day Date Time Amount Balance Category Type Archived Show Accrued Adjustments Manual Adj Button Definition Displays the day on which the time was posted or taken Displays the date on which the time was posted or taken Displays the time at which the time was posted or taken Displays the number of hours posted or taken Displays the running balance after the transaction Displays the Category of the benefit time Displays what type of benefit transaction it was Bonus Hours indicates time earned or accrued Misc Entry Indicates time taken Hours Adj Indicates a manual adjustment Balance Adj Indicates a Balance Adjustment Indicates whether these transactions are in a data set that has already been archived For more information on Archiving see Archive page 260 Check this box to display the adjustments that have been made to accrued Benefits Click this button to make a manual adjustment For more information see Manual Benefit Adjustment page 142 4 Click OK to close the Benefit Details screen Benefit Accruals Manual Benefit Adjustment It is possible to make manual adjustments to an employee s Benefit Entitlement These adjustm
90. 00 Pro Manual Reindex Repair Update Set Reprocess Date Fix Unassigned Badges Backup Restore Repost from R files Purge R files Archive and Restore Other Import Export O January 2009 Time America Inc Allows the user to Repair Reindex and Update the TA100 Pro databases For more information on these features see the sections on Repairing page 253 Reindexing page 253 and Updating page 253 Allows the user to Set employees Reprocess Date For more information on this feature see Set Reprocess Date page 256 Allows the user to use the Fix Unassigned Badges utility For more information on this feature see Fix Unassigned Badges page 257 Allows the employee to Backup the TA100 Pro database For more information on these features see System Backup page 263 Allows the employee to Restore the TA100 Pro database from the backup Allows the employee to repost R files polled clock data to the TA100 Pro database For more information on this feature see Repost R Files page 258 Allows the employee to delete old R files polled clock data from the TA100 Pro directory For more information on this feature see Purge R Files page 258 Allows the employee to Archive the TA100 Pro database and restore a previously archived database For more information on these features see Archive page 260 This section defines the user s access rights to the other items in
91. 00 Pro configuration Individual allowing you to selecting individual employees or groups of employees Both methods are described below Running a Report by Range 1 Click the Reports button to display the report categories 2 Select the category in which you wish to search The Select Report list for that category will appear NOTE The Location feature allows you to move a report from one report category to another Reports and Listings Selection fa Weekly E Daiy 2 Exports Listings Time Card Time Card One Line Time Card One Line 14200 Time Card Category Summary Time Card Dept Time Card Dept Summary Hours Shift Summary Time Card Differential Who s Scheduled Time Card Diff Cat Summary Coverage Approved Timecards Unapproved Timecards Employee Wage Individual Schedule Employee Wage with Category Department Wage Level Distribution Be Figure 156 Example Select Report dialog box 3 Select the report you wish to run 4 Select the Ranges option A v 5 Click the Run button The Report Parameter Selection dialog box will open O January 2009 Time America Inc 183 TA100 Pro Manual Time Card Parameter Selection Pay period O Special O Yesterday O Today Employees Employees Departments Divisions Groups pre Pay Periods back 1 Y Sree 02 15 2009 E EE Policy 00 3 Forecasting Period Reprocess dActive Olnactive O Al all O Ran
92. 06 08 03 Fri 16 00 2m Figure 144 Online Timecard from Approval Editor 4 Add edit or delete the transaction as needed For more information on these tasks see Adding and Editing Transactions page 162 and Deleting a Transaction page 169 The Schedules Tab and Transaction tab will also be available to view and edit See Employee Schedule Tab page 125 and the Employee Transactions Tab page 133 O January 2009 Time America Inc 174 TA100 Pro Manual Status Board The Status Board screen is a useful tool that displays the last punch for recorded for each employee within a certain time range for example in the last 18 hours This is an excellent way to find out the current whereabouts of your employees The data displayed in the screen is for information purposes only and cannot be edited NOTE If an employee has not punched within the time range specified no data will appear next to his or her name 1 Click the Daily Operations menu Status Board The Status Board screen will open You may select a specific type of status to view or select All to display each status available onn wnat amet meam pre aaa Od Very Lach tatewd lee Get ay C O Foz A nl POCA OF OD ok gt Figure 145 Status Board 2 The Status Board screen contains the following information Setting Definition Number Displays the number of the employee Name Displays the name of the employee Out Explains the st
93. 100 Pro Manual System Utilities TA100 Pro provides utilities to keep your system running smoothly Among other things these utilities can repair databases perform backups and archive data for long term storage Because these utilities affect data and ultimately your payroll contact your local representative if you have questions or concerns about the operation of a specific utility The following utilities are found under the Utilities menu under File and are described in this section Reindex Databases Repair Databases Update Databases Initialize Databases Change Employee Number Change Employee Number Width Set Reprocess Date Fix Unassigned Badges Repost R Files Purge R Files Post Historical Data Archive Data Restore Archived Data Back Up System Files Restore System Files 35 TA100 PRO Time America Inc File Daily Operations Reports System Setup Communications Help Security b R l 2 Ye Import Export Repair Databases Print Reindex Databases Update Databases Environment Pave CC Iitialize Databases Login New User Change Employee Number Exit ALT F4 Change Employee Number width Set Reprocess Date Fix Unassigned Badges Repost from R files Purge R files Post Historical Data Archive Restore Archive System Backup System Restore Figure 200 Utilities Menu January 2009 Time Amer
94. 12 HOURS TO 24 HOURS MINUTES TO HUNDREDTHS 12MD 0 12NN 12 1AM 1 1PM 13 24M 2 2PM 14 3AM 3 3PM 15 44M 4 4PM 16 5AM 5 5PM 17 BAM 6 6PM 18 TAM 7 7PM 19 BAM 8 8PM 20 94M 9 SPM 21 104M 10 10PM 22 TAM 11 11PM 23 Macros Macros allow you to record keyboard steps in TA100 Pro and play them back by pressing a key For example you could record a macro to Poll time clocks 1 a Fon Click the Help menu Macros The Record Macro dialog box will open xi Uk Macro name Cancel Defined key Figure 220 Record Macro Press the key or key combination that will run this macro Enter a name for the macro no spaces Click OK to begin recording Perform the steps you wish to record Type the keystrokes you normally press to perform an operation on the keyboard Remember only keyboard operations can be recorded Press Shift F10 to stop recording The Stop Recording Macro dialog box will open January 2009 Time America Inc 268 TA100 Pro Manual Stop Recording Macro x Stop recording test Insert Literal Key to Resume Inset Pause Seconds A Continue Discard Figure 221 Stop Recording 7 Click one of the following Setting Definition OK Click OK to stop recording the macro Continue Click continue to continue recording the macro after a pause Discard Click Discard to cancel recording and discard the macro Insert
95. 2002 16 06 26 CLOCKED OUT ool 00005 da ree Thu 12 12 2002 06 55 39 CLOCKED IN 001 00005 00004 Jones David Thu 12 12 2002 16 02 07 CLOCKED OUT 001 00005 Fri 12 13 2002 06 53 23 CLOCKED IN 001 00005 Fri 12 13 2002 16 00 25 CLOCKED OUT 001 00005 Mon 12 16 2002 06 57 53 CLOCKED IN 001 00005 Mon 12 16 2002 15 59 45 CLOCKED OUT ool 00005 wj Tna 12 17 7007 07 02 59 CLOCHRD TH am nanne y December 2002 SUPERVISOR PROMPT INPUT Badge CLOCKED IN Name Date Time 5 Listed Number C Name Add Edit Delete I Show Inactives Print Close Figure 103 Configure Employee Transaction tab Setting Definition Day Displays the day of the transaction Date Displays the date of the transaction Time Displays the actual time of the transaction Key Displays the time clock function key pressed to generate the transaction i e for Clock In for day etc Prompt Displays the function prompt for the transaction Clock Displays the number of the clock at which the transaction was recorded NOTE No clock number will display if the transaction was entered by a supervisor through the TA100 Pro software Badge Displays the employee s badge number used for this transaction January 2009 Time America Inc 133 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Definition Supervisor This field shows audit trail information and displays the name and number of the supervisor who edited this transaction if any Prompt Displays the function prom
96. Badge dialog box will open Assign Badge Badge Number lM Valid Gk Cancel Figure 124 Adding a new Badge 3 Enter the Badge number you wish to assign to this employee and press Tab 4 Check the Valid box to indicate this badge is in use 5 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Badges screen January 2009 Time America Inc 151 TA100 Pro Manual Edit a Badge It is possible to edit a Badge in order to make it Invalid for this employee cannot be used by this employee to punch The badge number cannot be changed If you need to change a badge number it is best to make the old badge number inactive or delete it and add a new one 1 Navigate to the Badges tab of the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee Badges page 150 2 Click the Edit button The Assign Badge dialog box will open 3 Uncheck the Valid box to make the Badge invalid 4 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Badges screen Delete a Badge 1 Navigate to the Badges tab of the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee Badges page 150 2 Highlight the Badge you wish to delete 3 Click the Delete button You will be prompted xi 2 Are you sure you want to delete Figure 125 Deletion Confirmation 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion and return to the Badges screen Employee Clocks Tab The Clocks tab is used to assign Hand Readers and TA7000 clocks to the employees This is
97. Codes tab includes the following information Settin Definition Differential None This line of information will specify the codes for hours that do not have differential adjustments Differential D1 D3 These lines of information will specify the REG OT1 OT2 OT3 codes used by hours allocated to each Shift Differential Regular Hours are hours paid at straight time Enter the code your payroll application uses to refer to Regular hours OT1 hours are hours paid at the factor defined for OT1 in the Payroll Policy Enter the code your payroll application uses to refer to hours paid at the OT1 factor OT2 hours are hours paid at the factor defined for OT2 in the Payroll Policy Enter the code your payroll application uses to refer to hours paid at the OT2 factor NOTE This option will only appear if OT2 has been selected on the Configure tab of the Main Company configuration dialog box OTS hours are hours paid at the factor defined for OT3 in the Payroll Policy Enter the code your payroll application uses to refer to hours paid at the OTS factor NOTE This option will only appear if OT3 has been selected on the Configure tab of the Main Company configuration dialog box January 2009 Time America Inc TA100 Pro Manual Field Code Enter the code that indicates which field of your payroll software this category will be mapped to This code differentiates between categories of time that use t
98. Date Days of Service Code Description Allowed Taken Pending Left Definition Displays the employee s Fiscal Date set on the Detail tab for information purposes Displays the employee s Hire Date set on the Detail tab for information purposes Displays the number of Days of Service the employee has for information purposes Displays the category code of the benefit i e VAC SICK etc Displays the category name of the benefit i e Vacation Sick etc Displays the number of hours the employee has either been granted or earned This number is based on the Benefit Accrual settings if applicable or can be manually edited to grant Benefit Entitlement Displays the number of hours of the benefit the employee has already taken This number is calculated from the Miscellaneous entries on the employee s time card Displays the number of hours of the benefit the employee will take in the future within the current pay period Displays the number of hours left This is calculated by subtracting the Taken and Pending amounts from the Allowed as follows Left Allowed Taken Pending January 2009 Time America Inc 140 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Definition Count Displays the number of individual days on which the benefit time was taken or is pending Carry Date Displays the date on which the benefits will roll over also known as the Reference Date or Reset Date Update Click this
99. Definition Time Outs These settings determine how long prompts and messages will appear on the clock s screen For data input Enter the length of time from 0 1 to 99 9 seconds the clock will wait for a response to a prompt before returning to an idle state Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a second For example 10 0 means that the clock will wait 10 seconds for a response after prompting for input The default is 60 0 seconds To Enter function Enter the length of time from 0 1 to 99 9 seconds the clock will wait for a response to enter a function before returning to an idle state Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a second For example 5 5 means that the clock will wait 5 2 seconds for a response after prompting for input The default is 20 0 seconds Displayed Enter the length of time from 0 1 to 99 9 messages seconds the clock will display any message before returning to an idle state Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a second For example 1 5 means that the clock will display messages for 112 seconds The default is 2 0 seconds O January 2009 Time America Inc 212 TA100 Pro Manual Supervisor questions Error messages Messages Enter Function Invalid Source Invalid Badge Invalid Level Enter the length of time from 0 1 to 99 9 seconds the clock will wait for a response to a supervisor question before returning to an idle state Time is entered in seconds and tent
100. Description In this field enter PC Clock for the description January 2009 Time America Inc Click this button to select employees individually TA100 Pro Manual Active Initial Source Swipe Key Bar Code Key Click the Active check box to indicate that the clock is currently in use Uncheck this box if the clock is not being used at this time Check the applicable check box es to indicate the method by which an employee badge number is entered into the clock The employee s badge number can be entered by swiping a badge The employee s badge number can be entered by pressing keys on the clock keypad The employee s badge number can be entered by scanning a bar code The employee s badge number can be entered by pressing keys on the clock keypad 3 The Configure tab defines the message and timeout settings and contains the following information Configure TA600 Series Clocks PC PC Clock y TIME OUTS PC PC Clock z For data input 60 0 ToENTER FUNCTION 20 0 Displayed messages 20 y MESSAGES ENTER FUNCTION message ENTER FUNCTION INVALID SOURCE message INVALID SOURCE INVALID BADGE message INVALID BADGE Supervisor questions 90 0 INVALID LEVEL message INVALID LEVEL Error messages 1 5 Idle message r SWIPE amp GO BADGES Highest Swipe amp Go number to be used 0000 IF Use Feedback Enhancer T Skip recording of diagnostic and programming info F Display idle
101. E 252 Re p ir Database renan eena oieee EE N EE ETA eet ad ERANS 253 Reimdex Database EA E T E E do da 253 Update Datadas eS seeen eeen aa td e ts ENa 254 Inttralize DOtabases oi AS E E 254 Change Employee Number sica ia papi EEEE 255 Change Employee Number Widih ooononcniccnoncnonnnonncononnnonnonnnonnnnnnnnnnonnn cone cone on ne on neon nena nena nena enn nene anna nin cnn nc necnnos 255 S t Repr cess Data idad sisi 256 FIX UNassIgned BABES eae toca ages ound a Ea E Eae a EAEE 257 REPOST frome FUE Sees NN 258 PULSO E DN AAN sects A E E ENE A A Ape aaa ci 258 Post HIStOFICAL DGIQ is util aio sa Cease T ba a and ARIAS Iaido ride 259 A NO 260 IITA Aa AUI AEE EA a Rara Coes ead Ina tirada des 262 SVSLCME BACKUP NN 263 USTEDES O TEESE EEE secu stds tesuvade legucedion subaive eau sdee tusbvedecesteaus costae pit idea ah teas daros 264 ADDITIONAL UTILITIES vepiseeeosctdiceteeidetesacavsctectudetecovunnensntecatysavaneckindedste carscacnsetisecevnpteatheedudevers NEIE A ERROREEN 265 Calculator aleteo 265 Calendar ltd E Ed Ad ines 266 ADO a id e e nl ed E nod e ed 266 SALES O AA sbsesssesssessdesveedeqeisseasapie costes sadestanstensbapdsseatesctdedsavasonsdveddqeseseavsesteesies 267 COnVverSION NARA shishbsscuasseends codhadossaaseastesbbandbencess aasdesdes coasaassvdbas deceabeansbches seas asaanteasteesess 267 MACROS AAA ia ele dano o Sede wes o o dico 268 O January 2009 Time America Inc vii TA100 Pro Manual Chapter
102. E BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO ALL OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT CLICK THE DO NOT ACCEPT BUTTON AND THE INSTALLATION PROCESS WILL NOT CONTINUE PROMPTLY RETURN THE PACKAGE AND THE ACCOMPANYING ITEMS f Do you accept all the terms of the preceding License Agreement If you choose No the setup will close To install Genesis Pro you must accept this agreement Figure 3 TA100 Pro License Agreement 5 Click Yes to accept the License Agreement The Choose Destination Location screen will appear Genesis Pro Setup Choose Destination Location Select folder where Setup will install files Setup will install Genesis Pro in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder m Destination Folder CAGENPRO Browse InstallShield Figure 4 Choose Destination Location 6 TA100 Pro will be installed in the C TA100PRO directory by default If you wish to install to a different directory click the Browse and select the directory to which you wish to install Click the Next button when you are ready to proceed The Setup Type screen will appear January 2009 Time America Inc 11 TA100 Pro Manual Genesis Pro Setup x Setup Type Choose the setup type that best suits pour needs A y Click the type of Setup you prefer Description Workstation This option is for a ful
103. ETERS idas 216 A AEN CLEE AER EEA EAEE A E A E EA E AA RA E E ES 218 Configur a TASC ClOCK EE E E a E E E E 219 ATS SERIES CLOCKS sie 4 05 eaaa a a aaa sansa E Ea a aa E E ET Eea aaa aa sed 226 Configure ATS CLOCKS iconoclasta tea eaS o SA EE EEE E S e E ESEE saap isai S eitas 226 HAND READER O OCE Oa t a a E a a a a aT E EEE ETEO RERE 229 Configure a Hand Redder Clock oiouininii ncianc iio senseo reiini esaea isi reis aaea 229 ADD ACLOCK aeeoea aaaea aT EE aa E aoa EE E ATT E EE PECENE AEE EE E a ERER 234 EDITA CLOCK e ces aE e she ok E E ais 235 DELETEA CLOCK usina air 235 SET DATE AND TME coi a A E A E A 236 CHAPTER XI TERMINAL POLLING AND AUTOPROCESSING sccsssssssscsscccsssscssccesssssssscesseccees 238 POLLING tddi 238 Polling Time Clocks dit iii add tidad ice E indi di Woes ias 238 CONFIGURE AN AUTOPROCES Sv sscseudcteducavectecgucede covunsconnpevstpsasaneceatdedetecosteas aE O EEE R REE tito 240 RUNAS SCT VICE AE E EEIE ia T OES EE EEE 240 Vaala ROWN EATA E E EEEE E EAT EAA E EE E EET 241 VAO DaO AAO E ANE E EEN E AEE TEE NEEE TE E EESE E E as aati eee 245 Delete On A t Proces roces ae A E O ra cant a e a ea Seia iris 245 CHAPTER XII UTILITIES cas siveccscciies coceesssniasennssesesevsesosascstecessanseasssedeseseesosusesdedessstesesassedecedascssasessscscuDsaesssectde 247 IMPORTING A AEO EEEE eos 247 Advanced IMPOr tas ne eatea eee EE EEEIEE 247 EXPORTING DATA ET E A T 249 SYSTEM UTILITIES coi SD TEASEE EEE E EE Ei a
104. European DD MM YYYY Print OK Cancel Figure 26 Main Company Configure tab 4 Fill in the settings as appropriate Setting Definition Daylight savings Check this box if your company is in a state Divisions Department Job Lunches Breaks O January 2009 Time America Inc that observes daylight savings time Typically you will check this box Check this box to enable the Divisions feature A Division is a subset of the main company such as a branch different location or subsidiary company TIP Companies who submit multiple company codes to their payroll service may want to use Divisions Check this box to enable the Departments feature Departments reflect the business units within your company and are the top level of Job Costing NOTE You will have the opportunity to customize this nomenclature in the next screen Check this box to enable the Job level Jobs are the second level of Job Costing NOTE You will have the opportunity to customize this nomenclature in the next screen Check this box to enable this option if your employees will punch for lunch or lunch will be deducted automatically Check this box to enable this option if your employees will punch for break or break will be deducted automatically 29 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Use level wage before default assignment wage Paid lunches and breaks do not accrue toward overtime Use SMTP for emai
105. First Page Previous Page Go To Page Next Page Last Page Zoom Close Preview Definition Click this button to navigate to the first page of a multi page report Click this button to navigate to the previous page in a multi page report Click this button to enter the page to which you wish to go Click this button to navigate to the next page in a multi page report Click this button to navigate to the last page of a multi page report Use this box to change the zoom percentage of the report to show more or less of the report on screen Click this button to exit the Report Preview screen January 2009 Time America Inc 194 TA100 Pro Manual Print Click this button to print the report to the printer currently selected under File Print See Important Information on Printing Reports page 182 4 Click the Close Preview button to exit the Report Preview screen 5 Click the Close button until you have exited all the dialog boxes Emailing a Report TA100 Pro allows you to email reports in Adobe Acrobat format using the email program currently configured on your computer TA100 Pro will attach the report to an email and place it in the outgoing email queue of your email program Your email program will then be responsible for sending the email The title of the email will be the same as the report you have chosen and the text of the message will include t he date and time at which the report was run
106. Literal Click Insert Literal to record the literal meaning of the next keystroke For example if CTRL P is used to execute a macro but you want to record CTRL P as a keystroke click Insert Literal before typing the keystroke This prevents a macro from being recorded Insert Pause Click this button to insert a pause into the macro then select the Key to Resume or Seconds option below Key to Resume Select this option to pause the macro until SHIFT F10 is pressed to continue Seconds Click Seconds to pause the macro for a period of time in seconds Enter the number of seconds in the adjacent field January 2009 Time America Inc 269 TA100 Pro Manual Additional polling key Approval Editor Archive configure Audit Trails AutoProcessing Background change Backup o AAA A ra Bell Schedules configure edit Benefit Accruals AMIS E atta tade ted E AS update to current Benefit Accumulators configure Benefit Entitlement configure delete accumulators configure employee Categories delete Change Employee Number Change Employee Number Width Change Password Clocks O January 2009 Time America Inc INDEX ANI ie A Gaia Ais 234 A hs eee eer re tree cer aia ta 226 ATS CONTIQUlB cooooocccnonoccccnnooocnnnnocnnnnnncnnnnnos 226 auto poling essa a AAR 240 CONNECTIONS coooococcccccccccccnnnnononccnncnncnnnnn o nono 197 Dele erea 235 Sdltind PEA E R A EE 235 Hand Readet ccccceceeee
107. Modem LAN Smart Converter e Ethernet External For more information on these connections see Types of Connections page 197 Select the communications port on your computer that will be used to communicate with the clock The factory default is COM 1 This is the Direct connection RS232 in the Communication Path field e RS232 Baud 9600 for all clocks These settings become available when LAN has been chosen as the communication type in the Communication Path field The default is 9600 baud Make sure the baud rate selected here matches the baud rate defined at the clock All clocks use 9600 for LAN The TA600 can go as high as 19200 TIP You can use the Configuration Badge 000000000 at the clock to view modify the clock s baud rate January 2009 Time America Inc 199 TA100 Pro Manual LAN ID Enter the clock s unique identification number in this field This number provides a way for the system to distinguish between individual clocks Any one character alphabetic or numeric ID may be used Make sure the LAN ID defined here matches the LAN ID defined at the clock TIP You can use the Configuration Badge 000000000 at the clock to view modify the clock s LAN ID Converter Select the type of converter used in the LAN setup The RTS converters have been phased out over the years and were mainly used with AT style computers that used a 25 pin serial port Most new computers use 9 pin serial por
108. Number Width The number of digits width in the Employee Number is initially defined in the Configure Main Company dialog box However once employees have been added you can no longer change the setting through the Main Company screen This avoids accidental data loss This utility allows you to change the number of digits for Employee Numbers safely Typically the width should only be changed to a higher longer number in order to avoid losing data When digit length is increased the digits are added on to the left of the current number When digits are taken away they are taken from the right 1 Click the File menu Utilities Change Employee Number Width The Change Employee Number Width dialog box will open O January 2009 Time America Inc 255 TA100 Pro Manual Change Employee Number Width fold Employee Width is 5 New Employee Width is B Figure 206 Change Employee Number Width 2 Enter the number of digits for the new employee number 3 Click OK to commit the change Set Reprocess Date The Set Reprocess Date utility allows you to globally reset the reprocess date for employees Processing occurs when TA100 Pro takes the punches from a clock and applies them to the correct employee taking into account pre setup information such as Company Policy Shift rules etc Reprocessing is what happens when a user has made changes to the polled punches and or configuration information and now needs to have TA10
109. ONTIQUT O tense teceteilecedas hadeta ia aiaeei 56 delei a a e aii 66 lotto all 65 SMS cid tii 56 lO a 66 dele ici tata 67 lata 66 SOMO Puso 56 Shortcut keys coocooccccoccconoccnonancconnccnannn nan nnnancnnno 22 Starting TA100 Pro cooooonoccccncccccnnccnonnnnnnannnnnanann 19 Salus ct acta alg neat iad teases 134 at OTE 135 oa E 136 OMPlOYO8 cccoccconiccccnno ronca nono 134 Support Technical osa linea 9 System FEQUIFEMENHS cooocccccococcccccnnoncncnanonanc nana nanannnnas 10 System Environment CUSTOMIZING saeia aoii eii a 25 System Utilities 0 00aaee aeee 252 TADOO Series cooooonocccoccccconcconnoncnanncnnancnnn 198 208 CONMTiQUl O soea e s 198 208 216 TA520 530 vico Tia is 198 208 TA600 Series cooooonocccocccconcccnnoncnanncnnancnnn 198 208 configure ne eneee ei 198 208 216 TADO eninin a da 198 208 TASO satan rta Sal Seeds teeta dese 218 CONTIQUIC i aviueie iaa 219 Technical Suppor esselar aeae 9 A O aa aA rai aaea 197 CONNECTIONS iteraci n 197 272 TA100 Pro Manual INDEX Cont Timecard cinco aia 160 ACCESSING iraa aa a 160 COSCIIPTION seiis 121 NAVIGATING eiiiai niia a a 161 OMME aaas anaa a aa 160 A aia 160 Tips and Techniques 21 Toolbar displaying large buttons 26 TTansactiONS ooccccncnccccoocnnnnonnnnnnnns 160 162 169 oo Deere eee AERE 163 164 166 167 169 AGING A ON 162 A tee igtne ies 169 descriptas 133 Ol tae da diodo 166 167 CCILING A AEE 162 172 176 Global tte di
110. OYE Code 1 a M Active Accumulators Categories to sum Posting Basis Statdate ReferenceDate Code Name Y E 1 Listed Add Regular Overtime 2 Overtime 1 Edt Delte Figure 84 Benefit Accruals 2 The Configure Benefit Accrual dialog box contains the following information January 2009 Time America Inc 105 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Code Name Active Accumulators Code Posting Basis Start Date Reference Date Categories to Sum Code Name Regular Overtime 1 Overtime 2 O January 2009 Time America Inc Definition This is a required field Enter the code or number you wish to use to refer to this Benefit Accrual policy You may enter up to 3 characters This is a required field Enter the name you wish to use to refer to this Benefit Accrual policy You may enter up to 30 characters Click the Active check box to indicate that the policy is currently in use Uncheck this box if the policy is not being used at this time Lists the accumulators that make up this Benefit Accrual policy For more information on this feature see Benefit Accruals page 105 Indicates the unique number assigned to the selected accumulator Indicates the frequency with which benefits are posted in this accumulator Indicates the date on which this policy became effective NOTE This is typically set t
111. Policies 001 General Holidays Overtime Differential Exceptions Standard Policy v Pay Holidays 3 Listed A Holiday Eligibility Holiday Parameters Minimum days of employment to qualify 45 Apply holiday when not scheduled to work Required to work the scheduled day qu Holiday hours can accrue towards overtime Before and after Before or after O None Hours to add for each worked holiday 8 00 Minimum before 0 00 Multiply worked holiday hours to apply to HOL Minimum after 0 00 Hours to add for each un worked holiday 8 00 Given Minimum 0 00 Given Maximum 0 00 Beginning pay rate if holiday is worked Standard ORG Oo O0T2 Beginning pay rate if holiday is worked Secondary REG Oom Oor2 Reset at end of day Figure 37 Policies Holidays tab Setting Pay Holidays Holiday Eligibility Minimum days of employment to qualify Required to work the scheduled day Minimum before Minimum after Holiday Parameters January 2009 Time America Inc Definition Check this option if you wish the program to pay holidays You will specify the dates of the holidays in a separate dialog box See Holidays page 67 These settings define the prerequisites for being paid for the holiday Enter the minimum number of days up to 3 digits from the hire date for an employee to qualify for non worked holiday pay The default is 90 meaning 90
112. Pro can automatically calculate the available benefit time for your employees These calculations are based upon rules that can account for different benefit types vacation sick personal etc different accrual methods seniority rules and other factors Benefit time taken is automatically subtracted from the available benefits so that balances are always accurate TA100 Pro allows for an unlimited number of policies so that you can accommodate different situations within your company Each policy contains accumulators that specify the category amounts and rules for earning benefits After the policies are created they are assigned to the appropriate employees within the company NOTE Benefit Accruals is an additional module added into TA100 Pro If you did not purchase Benefit Accruals you will have Benefit Entitlement instead See Benefit Entitlement Configure page 137 There are two commands within the Benefit Accruals menu Both are described below Lv TA100 Pro Time America Inc File PEDAS cs Reports System Setup Communications Help an LA Approval Editor Y 22 Employee Status Board Y Task Organizer Global Benefit Accruals Configure Pu Update to current Figure 83 Benefit Accruals menu Configure Benefit Accruals 1 Click the Daily Operations menu Benefit Accruals Configure The Configure Benefit Accrual window will open Configure Benefit Accrual 100 General FT HOURLY EMPL
113. System Generated Absences January 2009 Time America Inc 172 TA100 Pro Manual e Missing Punches It is also possible to edit transactions directly from the Approval Editor Double clicking a transaction from the Approval Editor opens the Online Timecard from which you can add edit and delete transactions normally See Approval Editor page 172 1 Click the Daily Operations menu Approval Editor or by clicking on a Ey the The Approval Editor screen will open Approval Editor Selection Reason A Absent Anderson Frank 00003 Wed 02 18 2009 07 00 00 Absent Anderson Frank 00003 Thu 02 19 2009 07 00 00 Absent Anderson Frank 00003 Fri 02 20 2009 07 00 00 Absent Anderson Frank 00003 Mon 02 23 2009 07 00 00 Absent Anderson Frank 00003 Tue 02 24 2009 07 05 00 Missing Punch Sample Joe 12345 Mon 02 16 2009 08 00 00 Absent Smith John 00005 Mon 02 16 2009 07 00 00 Absent Washington Carol 00001 Mon 02 16 2003 07 00 00 Absent Mi 10 Listed 2 Show Count Totals O Active Employees Inactive Employees All Employees ALL GROUPS y aui prvisrows y Figure 143 Approval Editor 2 The Approval Editor contains the following information Setting Definition Absences Select this option to show only Absent Exceptions needing approval Missing Select this option to show only Missing Punch Exceptions needing approval All Select this option to show all Absences Missing Punches an
114. TA100 PRO User s Guide 2009 CTATOO Read This First Welcome Welcome to Time America s TA100 Pro User s Guide This manual is shipped with each new TA100 Pro software package and is intended solely for use by the licensee This User Guide describes the installation and operation of the TA100 Pro system Accuracy of Information The content of this manual is subject to change without notice Before using this manual verify that the information contained in it is current Proper installation configuration and operation of the software are contingent upon reading and following the procedures contained in the latest revision of the manual Additional Copies Additional copies of this manual may be obtained from our website at www timeamerica com or from your local Time America dealer User Comments Every effort is made to ensure that the information contained in this manual is accurate at the time of publication If you find an error or omission while reading this manual direct your comments to Time America Inc Attn Technical Publications 15990 N Greenway Hayden Loop Suite D 500 Scottsdale AZ 85260 Or you can send emails to training timeamerica com We welcome your comments and suggestions Software Release Version 4 01B TA100 Pro Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS CHAPTERI ABOUT THIS MANUALvvsisscssssessssencssenssrsncssoncseenssssseosesecsoscesensssvesessoessbassonsesessassesesseavesen
115. TA100 Pro Manual Chapter VIII Timecard and Transaction Maintenance This section describes the concepts and tasks associated with managing employee time records including editing and adding time entries Online Timecard The Online Timecard allows you to view add edit and delete employee time entries The Timecard can be accessed from two locations the Configure Employee dialog box and the Approval Editor NOTE There are slight differences between the Online Timecard tab of the Configure Employee screen and the Online Timecard screen accessed from the Approval Editor The Online Timecard from the Approval Editor e Displays the Attendance Code flags next to the punches e Does not provide a way to switch to the Transactions screen e Does not offer a Multiple Miscellaneous button e Does not print exceptions in different colors Accessing the Online Timecard from the Configure Employee Screen 1 Click the Daily Operations menu Employee The Configure Employee dialog box will open 2 The Timecard tab will be selected automatically Besrocess Aad Trans Edad Stan Edna 5150 paise Mac Quiste C em gee Figure 131 Online Timecard tab Configure Employee The Online Timecard week view at bottom of page now indicates holidays italics current date blue highlight and days scheduled to work underline date Also a double click or right click in the Job Costing field will display all job
116. TAS20L s Override Round Override Automatic Lunches and Breaks Figure 153 Global Add Transaction Details 4 Fill in the settings as described in the Adding and Editing Transactions section page 162 5 Click the OK button to commit the changes and return to the Global Add Transaction dialog box Click OK again to complete the entry Click Close to exit the dialog box January 2009 Time America Inc 181 TA100 Pro Manual Chapter X Reports TA100 Pro has more than 300 available reports In the interest of brevity this section will focus on the concepts and techniques associated with running reports and listings rather than on the specifics of running every one of the reports Listings are a type of report that lists the items and settings in your TA100 Pro database Listings are good to print for reference information Examples are listings of Departments Policies Rounding rules Clocks etc TA100 Pro Time America Inc File Daily Operations MOTS System Setup Communications Help PEA gt a s Period Reports weekly Reports Daily Reports Payroll Exports Listings Location Figure 154 Reports Menu Important Information on Printing Reports TA100 Pro prints reports to the printer that is currently defined for the program under File Print By default this is the same as the Windows default printer If you wish to choose a different printer you must make the change prior to running th
117. This Hourly Wage is also known as the Level Wage If this wage is different than the employee s individual wage the employee s individual wage takes precedence To cause the Hourly Wage Level Wage to take precedence check the Use Level Wage before default assignment wage option on the Configure tab of the Configure Main Company dialog box 76 TA100 Pro Manual Budgeted Total Enter the maximum number of hours Hours HH MM that are budgeted for this entire department per day in the pay period This information is used for Actual vs Budgeted reports only it does not impact the employee s ability to clock in This field is optional This number indicates the amount budgeted per day in the pay period Calculate this number by multiplying the number of employees working in the department by the number of hours each employee is expected to accumulate in the pay period This number is then divided by the total number of days in the pay period Example 10 employees X 40 hours per pay period 400 total hours 400 total hours 7 days in the pay period 57 14 budgeted total hours Budgeted Total Enter the maximum number of dollars that Dollars are budgeted for this entire department per day in the pay period This information is used for Actual vs Budgeted reports only it does not impact the employee s ability to clock in This field is optional This number indicates the dollars budgeted per day in the pay period Calcu
118. WORK Group fax SSC 1 07 17 03 Thu 07 18 03 Fri WORK 07 00 16 00 1 07 21 03 Mon WORK 08 00 15 30 1 I 07 22 03 Tue 08 00 1 Dl aines Peter 00003 Anderson Frank 00004 Jones David 00005 Smith John Auto processing Show Schedule Forecasting Approve Pay Periods back 0 Key From 07 14 2003 to 07 27 2003 lor 7 15 2003 07 16 2003 07 17 2003 07 18 2003 Reg 8 0 00 5 Listed Number C Name Y Show Inactives Figure 95 Configure Employee Timecard tab Setting Definition O January 2009 Time America Inc 121 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Attendance Code Date Day Cat Start Stop Department Reg O January 2009 Time America Inc Definition This field is not labeled lt displays a code to indicate an exception regarding the entry The options are e A Indicates a system generated absence This entry will display in Red e M Indicates a missing punch This entry will display in purple e I Indicates a work period In Progress This entry will display in green e D Indicates a default work entry was added when the employee missed a punch as defined in the Policy associated with this employee e F Indicates that the entry was created when TA100 Pro forecasted the employee s hours Time forecasting will display future time transactions based on the employee s current schedule on screen and in reports e S Indicates TA100 Pro has au
119. a Inc 197 TA100 Pro Manual clock Time America recommends U S Robotics modems as they are capable of communicating with the clock at the 1200 and 2400 baud rates required e The Ethernet connection is designed for Local or Wide Area Networks using the TCP IP protocol The terminal is connected to the network through a hub just like any other computer on the network As part of the configuration of the clock you will choose the type of connection for each clock The configuration dialog box will prompt you for information specific to the type of connection you have chosen Smart Converters Using a Smart Converter TA100 Pro can transform a LAN clock into a Modem clock TA500 TA600 and TA7000 Series TA520 530 TA620 TA7000 Configuration of the TA500 Series TA600 Series and TA7000 Series time clocks is virtually identical For this reason they are combined into one section Since multiple clocks can be defined in the TA100 Pro a copy feature is available to copy an existing clock s parameters when adding a new clock This eliminates the need to re enter an entirely new clock configuration Configure a TA500 TA600 TA7000 Series Clock 1 Click the Communications menu Configure TA500 or TA600 or TA7000 The Configure Clock dialog box will open The dialog box contains several tabs all of which are described below Configure TA500 Series Clocks il Demo 520 FESTA int deel PE efin for re
120. a Shift CTO Picasa dr li dans dd Shaws agedbdocsdd ia 65 Edita Shift GrOUp AS A A RS A 65 Delete a Shift Group Sii id A Eao EE EAEE iS aS ESEE E EES ERER 66 VOLO KONTI A dd dis td 66 Edita Shifter A dt tdt E EEE S EREN 66 Delete a Mba it a a Ghibsedssesasesidesieeds desaseauceadinstaaeliaecdaedsesacssasaschissadegetapeaoaoonsersc 67 Adda Rounding Rule tddi lenin danna dao alas ias do dad EAEE Sap Ei Fe Ea A 67 Edit a Rounding Rule ou aaa daa trade dado E re Oe E OARE ESE A ri 68 HOLIDAYS A A A ad 69 Configure Holidays Lacio nan paa 69 Adda Holda y ii a ie 70 Edita Holiday a a ai owen 70 Delete HOMAGY ii id ali Eee 72 GROUPS A g E A E AA A E AOS 72 CONJIBUTEGIOUDS a a ii 72 Adda Group renea ii cli diia 73 Edit CIO PS lie as 73 Deleted GTOUP dai E E 74 DEPARTMENTS o a r E OET TEE O O ETE E O E E 75 Configur Department iii TEESE NA EE 75 ADA Dep rtment A A Ad EES 78 Edit a Deparmentiainiin a id A td os 78 Doe le te Department ir a Daan e e O EA aa aa Sa Dd 78 TOBA A AT A A SA 79 Configure JODS ooo il TAL cessive A Dd AA id dina 79 Add a Joba inna oeer A AA AA 8l Edita SODA A desea avec EAEI EERE ASEE E dada 82 Delete SODA A EE EEE EREE A oE VERA weaved A ira RE E aE E th ada 82 BELTS GHEDUBES vr tido En a E TA TI EII toe Era aan Toa Ex 83 Configure Bell Schedules on di sd IA a IO 83 Add a Bells Chula A AA ea dete Ree ee 84 Edita Bell Schedule A de PV eae sted A A ia 85 Delete a BelliSchedul ios le de De De AAA cil de 85 e RS 86 Conf
121. ake it difficult to troubleshoot certain communication problems If a printer is connected to the time clock s serial port TA500 or parallel port TA620 check this box to print time transactions as they are entered at the terminal Uncheck this box if a printer is not attached to the clock or you do not wish print transactions Controls how many lines should feed after the receipt has printed Enter the first line of the header you wish to print on all transaction listings printed directly from the terminal Up to 40 characters may be entered in this field The default is blank indicating Header line 1 will not be printed Enter the second line of the header you wish to print on all transaction listings printed directly from the terminal Up to 40 characters may be entered in this field The default is blank indicating Header line 2 will not be printed Check this box to download a pre defined Bell Schedule to this clock This option is only available with the Bell Schedule module 4 NOTE This tab will only apply to TA7000 Clocks using the fingerprint option The Assignments tab lists the employees that can use this clock This is only necessary if you are using fingerprints with TA7000 clocks January 2009 Time America Inc 206 TA100 Pro Manual The tab contains the following information Setting Employee Listing Fingerprint Mode Division Group Remove All Add All Add O January 2009
122. al Number 9 00 1 0 8 00 1 ll Rounding In 4 Out Rounding Lunch Rounding Break Rounding 1 IN OUT STANDAR Y E LUNCH STANDARD none DEFINED z Edit In Out Rounding Edit Lunch Rounding Add Break Rounding Figure 44 Shifts Shift Groups tab Setting Code Name Active Flex Open Forecasted hours for floaters January 2009 Time America Inc Definition This field is required Enter a unique shift code up to 3 characters in length Once saved this code cannot be changed This field is required Type the shift group name as you want it to appear in the system and on reports The shift group name can be up to 30 characters long Click the Active check box to indicate an active shift group Clear this check box if the group is inactive Rather than deleting a shift group from the system simply mark it inactive in the event you wish to use it again at a later date Click the Flex Open check box if the shift group consists of flexible shifts A flexible shift does not have a designated start and stop time It only specifies the number of hours that an employee must work to complete the shift When Flex Open is selected you cannot set the start and stop times for any individual shift created in this group You can only specify the total duration of the shift Also the Forecasted hours for floaters is unavailable Enter the number of hours that a floating employee must work within a pay period
123. al P Enter either a single page number or a single 2 page range For example 5 12 r Figure 22 Print 2 Select the printer to which you wish to print and click the Print button The topic will print Configuring the System Environment Environmental settings control various display and functional characteristics of your system The default settings can be modified Bell Background and Large Toolbar are available environment options A check mark y in front of the option means that the option is activated TA100 Pro Time America Inc ES Daily Operations Reports System Setup Communications Help 6 Security E Import E Export Utilities gt dy Print cl Background Qe Login New User Navigation Selection Exit ALT F4 Figure 23 Environment Menu Play Bell Tones You can customize TA100 Pro to play a tone at the end of a field when entering data 1 Click the File menu Environment Bell This will cause a bell tone to play whenever you come to the end of a field when entering data NOTE To remove follow Step 1 Change Screen Background You can customize the TA100 Pro background to display a graphic of your choice The graphic must be in bitmap bmp format O January 2009 Time America Inc 25 TA100 Pro Manual 1 3 4 Click the File menu Environment Background The Select Background window will open Preview Picture c A f blu amp bit bmp blue b
124. an In Out Out for Lunch In from Lunch etc based on the employee s last punch and the employee s schedule Check this option to have reports and the online timecard use an AM PM format instead of 24 hour format military time Check this option to suppress all floaters from each shift group This option controls the number of pay periods and days in which it is possible to edit transactions in the TA100 Pro system For instance Figure 26 specifies that two pay periods of transactions can be modified 30 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Definition Approval Editor Pay This option controls the number of pay Periods Back periods in which it is possible to edit transactions from the Approval Editor Auto logout This option will define the number of minutes minutes a user can be idle in TA100 Pro before it automatically logs them out Auto logout time This option will define a specific time all users will automatically be logged out of TA100 Pro Currency Name Enter the type of currency TA100 Pro should use The default is Dollars Date Format Select the manner in which dates should be displayed The options are American MM DD YYYY and European DD MM YYYY Date Delimiter Enter the character with which to delimit 6 dates The default is a slash When all settings are complete click the Defaults tab to select it The Defaults screen will appear Configure Main Company General Configure Defa
125. and Break rules defined in the Shift Group assigned to this employee as well as the Overtime rules defined in the Policy assigned to this employee Displays the number of hours at OT2 the employee will be paid for this entry if any This number is calculated using the Start and Stop times adjusted according to the Rounding Lunch and Break rules defined in the Shift Group assigned to this employee as well as the Overtime rules defined in the Policy assigned to this employee Displays the number of hours at OT3 the employee will be paid for this entry if any This number is calculated using the Start and Stop times adjusted according to the Rounding Lunch and Break rules defined in the Shift Group assigned to this employee as well as the Overtime rules defined in the Policy assigned to this employee Displays the number of unpaid hours for this entry if any Unpaid lunches and breaks will be reflected in this column if appropriate Displays the amount earned for this entry Displays a dot if a Supervisor has gone in to edit the punch Check this box to automatically process time transactions whenever they are added or edited Processing posts new and changed transactions to the database and allows them to be displayed on all reports If this box is clear you must click the Reprocess button each time you want to update employee transactions Depress this button to approve or unapprove the selected pay period for the selecte
126. as selected this field will become available Enter the amount of dollars for this transaction If an Hours category was selected this field will automatically fill in when enter the HH MM in the previous field REG OT1 0T2 0T3 Select the rate at which the Miscellaneous time should be paid Accrue towards Check this box to cause the Miscellaneous Overtime entry to count toward overtime daily and weekly Differential Select the differential at which the Miscellaneous time should be paid O January 2009 Time America Inc 168 TA100 Pro Manual Job Cost Level Check this option to have TA100 Pro Override override the Job Costing level s Calendar Using the drop down boxes at the top of the dialog box select the Month and Year that contains the days for which you wish to add the Miscellaneous transactions Click the dates on the calendar for which you wish to add the transactions The dates selected will appear to be indented 4 Click the Apply button The Category code will appear on the days selected Multiple Miscellaneous Transaction September y 2005 24 SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT Miscellaneous Information 1 2 3 Time os 00 00 vac VACATION Hours y 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 add subtract 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 HH MM 08 00 Amount J ie e c 18 19 20 21 22 23 I Accrue towards overtime Differential 010 203 25 26 27 28 29 20 VAC VAC VAC VAC VAC Jo
127. ate If this field is left blank no message will be displayed Select this option to choose an RS485 or RS232 connection Select this option to choose a modem solution Select this option to choose an Ethernet solution Select the applicable communication speed Make sure the baud rate selected here matches the baud rate defined at the clock e Rs485 Serial and Ethernet 9600 baud e Modem 9600 baud Select the communications port on your computer that will be used to communicate with the clock The factory default is COM 1 Enter the number of times the computer should attempt to connect to the clock if communication either fails or is interrupted during polling 230 TA100 Pro Manual Modem number IP Address IP Port Time difference between clock and computer Division Enter the phone number the PC modem must dial to communicate with this clock The number must be entered in the following format Outside Line Access Code Wait Symbol Area Code Phone Number If no outside line is required such as 9 simply enter the phone number Omit the area code if not applicable On most modems the wait symbol is a comma typically representing a one second pause Multiple wait symbols can be used if necessary Enter the IP address assigned to the Etherlink converter Displays the port used for Ethernet The default is 300 and should not be changed Altering this number will result in communicatio
128. atus of the employee Shows by Working displaying a colored square in the appropriate and Lunch status box Date and Displays the date and time of the last punch Time recorded Clock Displays the clock at which the punch occurred Key Displays the function key on the clock pressed Prompt Displays the prompt associated with the function key pressed Data Displays the code for any data that the employee was prompted to enter For example PRD1 for per diem TIP1 For tips etc January 2009 Time America Inc 175 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Hours Back All Punches No Punches Group Division Print Button Definition Enter the number of hours in the past you wish TA100 Pro to look for the last punch The default is 18 hours indicating that the Status Board screen will show all transactions that have occurred in the last 18 hours Select this option to display all employees regardless of whether they have punched within the Hours Back time range Select this option to display only employees who have punched within the Hours Back time range Select this option to display only employees who have not punched within the Hours Back time range Select a Group to only view employees assigned to that Group Select a Division to only view employees assigned to that Division Print the Status Board report 3 Click Close to exit the Status Board window Task Organizer The Task Organizer is an e
129. b Cost Level Override OK Cancel Figure 139 Multiple Miscellaneous 5 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Online Timecard From Schedule From Schedule adds a Clock In for the day and a Clock Out for the day punch taking the times from the employee s schedule This is useful when the employee did not punch in or out for the day but worked the scheduled times TIP You can check the Show Schedule option at the bottom of the Online Timecard in order to verify the scheduled Start and Stop times prior to using this feature 1 Navigate to the Online Timecard for the employee you wish to edit See Online Timecard page 160 2 Click the From Schedule button TA100 Pro will automatically fill in the Start and Stop fields with the employee s Scheduled Start and Stop times for the day Delete a Transaction You may need to delete a transaction that has been made in error Delete carefully as there is no way to retrieve deleted data O January 2009 Time America Inc 169 TA100 Pro Manual 1 Navigate to the Online Timecard see Online Timecard page 160 or the Transactions tab of the Configure Employee dialog box see Employee Transactions page 133 and select the employee you wish to edit Navigate to the transaction you wish to delete Click the Delete button You will be prompted with one of the following depending upon what you are deleting Confirm Delete Start Stop ime This
130. be changed Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Divisions screen Click Close to exit the Configure Divisions window Delete a Division Divisions that are in use cannot be deleted 1 2 Click the System Setup menu Company Divisions The Configure Divisions dialog box will open Highlight the division you wish to delete from the list at the side of the screen January 2009 Time America Inc 35 TA100 Pro Manual 3 Click the Delete button Confirmation X 22 Are you sure you want to delete x E Figure 30 Deletion Confirmation 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion 5 Click Close to exit the Configure Divisions window O January 2009 Time America Inc 36 TA100 Pro Manual Categories Categories are used to track and report types of time or money The built in categories are Absent Adjustment Break Bereavement Holiday Jury Duty Lunch Military Leave Sick NonPaid Other Paid Time Personal Day Per Diem 1 Per Diem 2 Sick Paid Cash Tips Charge Tips Vacation Worked Time You may edit and delete built in categories other than Work as well as add custom categories specific to your organization such as Floating Holidays Family Leave etc Categories are used in entering time and monetary adjustments for employees January 2009 Time America Inc 37 TA100 Pro Manual Configure Categories 1 Click the System Setup menu Categories The
131. cal Default Time PE e 1200 gt i Employee badge ji J soure ure upe i start 00 J00 Ke Vv Ker Sek jar Cade I Bar Code Nomber ctretes Po Add Edit Delete Print Close Figure 169 Configure TA500 TA600 TA7000 Clocks General Tab adas 3 2 Listed Code C Name I Show Inactives 2 The General tab defines the communication and general operation settings and contains the following information Setting Definition Code This is a required field Enter a unique code up to 4 characters to identify the clock Once defined this code cannot be changed January 2009 Time America Inc 198 TA100 Pro Manual Description Active Revision 5 or 6 Path Port Serial Baud Lan Baud Rate Enter a description of the clock This description will be seen in the system and on reports This field can be used to describe the clock type and it s location in your facility i e TA530 In BUILDING TWO The clock description can be up to 30 characters long Click the Active check box to indicate that the clock is currently in use Uncheck this box if the clock is not being used at this time THIS WILL ONLY SHOW FOR THE TA600 SERIES Select the appropriate revision you can check the revision by powering up the clock Select the type of connection this clock will use The options are e Direct RS232 e LAN RS485 e Modem Internal e Serial LAN Smart Converter e Remote Direct External Modem e
132. cececececececececececececececececevecs 179 GLOBAL ADD TRANSACTION dad ticas 180 CHAPTER X A eotsecsdendebeabecscecessdesseoesessd avdesecoasdsceuasssessasesssessde 182 IMPORTANT INFORMATION ON PRINTING REPORTS ccccccececesecececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececeeeeecece 182 Configure Pr A A as iras 182 RUNNING ARO dia aiii 183 Running a Report DY RANG nisreen e o aE E O EAEE AEE SEE caticdennadsdeddeand ORA TEE ERT RRE TEENER TE so 183 Running a Report by Individual insisi aoan ae aE E E aara TT AEE OEEO A EE ETE E SSS 188 ON SEREEN REPORT PREVIEW a aa 193 EMATINGAREPOR Tita 195 CHAPTER XI TERMINAL CONFIGURATION cssssccsssssccsssssccesssccccssssccsessscccecssccsesssacccssscsecsessccccesees 197 TYP SOF CONNECTIONS scans ai de 197 O January 2009 Time America Inc vi TA100 Pro Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont TA500 TA600 AND TA7000 SERIES TA520 530 TA620 TA7000 oooooccconocononononcnoconnnonononnccononnnonnnnnccnnnnnncnnnnnnnos 198 Configure a TASOO TA600 TA7000 Series CLOCK sccscsscssesccsssescesseseesecssesecscesccsseseeccsseeecaecaeesecaeesecnaeeneseeneeees 198 PASTS LAT TAND LATSO SERIES atorado 208 Configure a TA715 TA777 TA780 Series ClOCK oononconninncinocnocnnonnnnncnnncnno cono onno rn nono nono nono conan ronca nc nec ne cnncnnecnnos 208 CONFIGURING PC CLOCK d e a aa a aE aaa a basaban aE E EEE ileso TNcoNades beast 216 Configure PC Clockin nesiete e eaaa E S Ee E T
133. cellaneous rO a sch agate saa r eu a Aee aaa eyes 164 VIERNES AAA A 166 Ed A ts aida 166 Ed A add 167 Multiple MiscellanedUS iii danita sda nice E EEE aE SEES 167 IARE AA IATA E AEEA EEE o e o de A A o e kes 169 DELETE A TRANSACTION ccccccccecccecececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececeseeenens 169 AUDI RATES aa de e te a a da a a a o ato IN 170 Print the Audit Trails cccccsssssscsccccccccsssscsccccccccssescscccccccsssescesseccccecssssessecceceusesesseceeseusscsescsccesausessscssceseassevses 171 APPROVAL EDITOR ccccecececesececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececeseseseceeeeeeeeens 172 STATUSBO ARDE a a A a a EAE IM Ce 175 TASK ORGANIZER a a E a aa E a Ana 176 CHAPTER IX GLOBAL COMMANDS e esssessscseesseceessecesscsecssocecsseceessecssscecssccecsseceesseesscoecssoceessecesssecssoseesseeese 178 SELECTING EMPLOYEES IN GLOBAL OPERATION DIALOG BOXES ccocococonononononononononononononononononononononononononononononononono 178 Select Employees Individual ly 0 178 Select Employees Globally iii east 178 Select Employees DY GOUp nps oein reae speh sans abou ghee ISE EI E EE ena sea SEK EE EEEE EEES 178 Select Employees Dy DIVISION a case cass A fess ch aura Sede ads dae Iaido EA idas 179 GLOBAL MESSAGE ASSIGNMENT cccecececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececececece
134. ch period select this option Typically if the employee has a paid lunch clear the Punched check box and select None This prohibits the employee s lunch period from being deducted from the shift s total hours If Swipe and Go is in use this tells TA100 Pro what the maximum amount of time a lunch or break can be Enter time in military format TA100 Pro will then take all the punches and measure the duration between transactions If the duration is longer than the SG Max it will move to the next option These settings define how breaks are treated during this shift Check this box to indicate that employees should clock to and from break Select this option if the shift s break period is automatically deducted after a number of elapsed hours If the Punched check box is also selected the punched time overrides the elapsed time In other words if the employee does not punch Out for and In from break the shift s break period is automatically deducted after the elapsed time Define the elapsed time in the Elapsed Deduct box below If no restrictions apply to the shift s break select this option Typically if the employee has a paid break clear the Punched check box and select None This prohibits the employee s break from being deducted from the shift s total hours 62 January 2009 Time America Inc TA100 Pro Manual SG Max Exceptions Start Stop Punch Type Type Paid Elapsed Deduc
135. ch ate A 180 NAVIGAUNG cid date tae 162 January 2009 Time America Inc Unassigned Badges 257 Underlined letters o ooonnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnccnannnnnnno 21 Update rociis ed ee at a 254 User Accounts SYSOP iii Std hie ln 19 User Maintenance 97 Users dada 19 1 A A aa ee EAEE 101 delete vii ti i 102 A SE RE a 102 TUTTO S tei E A 247 additional bike teed eae Bie ia ad ees 265 A a Taaa aaa a aaan naa aaeeea a Ea 252 Wages id isa 146 GOO th A Bats Rael th 148 CONMQUIC siaae ee ata ee aiaa 146 Who s Logged IN ccoonocccconnoccccnononncccinnancccnnno 104 273
136. ch or run any other applications during the installation process 1 Insert the TA100 Pro Installation CD into the CD ROM drive of the computer on which you wish to install the software The InstallShield Wizard should automatically appear 2 If the InstallShield does not automatically run you may start the installation by navigating to My Computer and double clicking the icon for TA100 PRO lola Ele Edit view Favorites Tools Help Back E Qsearch Folders CBristory US DE X A Ede Address E my Computer z o Local Disk C Q GENPRO D 8 Control Panel 3 object s B My Computer Figure 1 My Computer 3 The TA100 Pro Setup window will appear O January 2009 Time America Inc 10 TA100 Pro Manual Genesis Pro Setup Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Genesis Pro The InstallShield Wizard will install Genesis Pro on your computer To continue click Next Figure 2 TA100 Pro Setup Wizard 4 Click the Next button to advance to the next screen The License Agreement screen will appear License Agreement Please read the following license agreement carefully Press the PAGE DOWN key to see the rest of the agreement IBENESIS PRO END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT TIME AMERICA LICENSE AGREEMENT This is a legal agreement between you the end user and Time America Inc HEREINAFTER TIME AMERICA BY CLICKING ON THE ACCEPT BUTTON YOU ARE AGREEING TO B
137. cial is chosen enter the first date you wish to display on the report If Pay Period is chosen this field will display the first date of the selected pay period If Yesterday or Today are chosen this field will display Yesterday or Today s date The purpose of this field changes depending upon which Date Range option has been chosen If Special is chosen enter the last date you wish to display on the report If Pay Period is chosen this field will display the last date of the selected pay period If Yesterday or Today are chosen this field will display Yesterday or Today s date Select this option to choose yesterday s date Select this option to choose today s date Check this box to include hours forecasted from schedule not worked yet on the reports Check this box to reprocess punch information prior to running the report NOTE This significantly slows down the running of the report and is unnecessary if you already have AutoProcessing turned on Select which type of employees you wish to be included on the report Active The report will print only Active employees Inactive The report will print only Inactive employees Both The report will print both Active and Inactive employees Check All to indicate that you wish all items in a collection to be printed Check Range to indicate that you wish to choose a range of items 185 TA100 Pro Manual Employees Select the employees for whom y
138. cking this box will enable the Hourly Wage field in which you define the amount of the wage NOTE This Hourly Wage is also known as the Level Wage If this wage is different than the employee s individual wage the employee s individual wage takes precedence To cause the Hourly Wage Level Wage to take precedence check the Use Level Wage before default assignment wage option on the Configure tab of the Configure Main Company dialog box Enter the maximum number of hours HH MM that are budgeted for this entire Job per day in the pay period This information is used for Actual vs Budgeted reports only it does not impact the employee s ability to clock in This field is optional This number indicates the amount budgeted per day in the pay period Calculate this number by multiplying the number of employees working in the Job by the number of hours each employee is expected to accumulate in the pay period This number is then divided by the total number of days in the pay period Example 10 employees X 40 hours per pay period 400 total hours 400 total hours 7 days in the pay period 57 14 budgeted total hours 80 TA100 Pro Manual Budgeted Total Enter the maximum number of dollars that Dollars are budgeted for this entire Job per day in the pay period This information is used for Actual vs Budgeted reports only it does not impact the employee s ability to clock in This field is optional This number in
139. counted as overtime The default is 40 00 223 TA100 Pro Manual Link back time HH MM Tip Punches Lunch Punches Pay Lunch Lunch Duration MM Deduct lunch after HH MM Lunch grace MM Lunch minimum MM Enter the maximum time HH MM an employee who has punched Out can punch back In and still have the new time included in the previous total For example the Link Back Time is set to 2 00 and overtime is paid after working 8 hours in a single day An employee punches In at 8 00 A M and Out at 5 00 P M with a one hour unpaid lunch lfthe employee punches back In at 6 30 P M within the 2 hour link back time and out at 9 30 P M the daily total shows 8 hours of regular time and 3 hours of overtime Check this box to enter tips at the clock for this policy Clear this box if no tips are entered at the clock Check this box to allow employees to punch In and Out for lunch Clear this box if employees do not punch for lunches Check this box if employee lunches are paid Paid lunches are not deducted from the shift s total hours Clear this check box if employee lunches are not paid Enter the lunch period duration in minutes for this policy The default is 60 minutes or one hour The lunch duration specified is automatically deducted from daily total hours after this length of time is worked The default is 5 00 In other words after 5 hours of worked time the value in Lunch Duration is deducted from t
140. d Reader biometric terminals are powerful computers capable of Hand Geometry recognition These devices collect clock data for TA100 Pro Check this box to make the clock Swipe amp Go The system then determines whether the individual punch was an In or an Out based on the last punch the employee did Enter the length of time duration the employee will have to enter information after the badge is swiped Enter the length of time duration the message displays on the time clock in seconds For example 2 means the message displays for two seconds The maximum message timeout is 9 seconds If 0 is entered no message displays Check this box to download employee messages to the clock for display when they punch in If an employee does not have a message assigned to them and this is checked they will not be able to punch in on an ATS series clock NOTE Hand Reader Clocks are not Third Party Terminals therefore they do not require a separate module Configure a Hand Reader Clock 1 Click the Communications menu Configure Hand Reader The Configure Clocks dialog box will open The Configure dialog box contains several tabs all of which are described below January 2009 Time America Inc Configure Hand Reader Clocks OListed General Time Zones Assignments Miscellaneous Function Key Proalnfo Code DfT Description e W Active Model ID3D C HP2000 HP3000 C HP4000 Idle prompt
141. d all other Exceptions Name Displays the employee s name Number Displays the employee s number DOW Displays the day of the week on which the item needing approval occurred Date Displays the date on which the item needing approval occurred Time Displays the time at which the item needing approval occurred Code Displays the Attendance Code for any infractions i e IL for In Late OG for Out Graced etc Reason Displays the reason in color why the transaction is displayed in the Approval Editor January 2009 Time America Inc 173 TA100 Pro Manual Show Count Totals Active Employees Inactive Employees All Employees Group Division Displays the number of infractions next to the label Select this option to show only Active employees Select this option to show only Inactive employees Select this option to show both Active and Inactive employees Select this option to display a specific Group Select this option to display a specific Division 3 To edit a transaction from the Approval Editor double click the transaction you wish to change The Online Timecard will open to display the pay period during which the transaction took place Approval for Lmployee UUUUZ Uaines Peter Timecerd Schedin Traranctions 05 27 03 Tue WOIE 16 00 01 00 pa 26 00 01 00 067 0 pee 16 59 Ih 01 00 3 03 Tue WORK 16 06 IL 01 00 06 04 03 Ved VOPR 15 36 IE 01 00 06 05 03 Tim MORK 26 00 It
142. d employee Check this box to display the employee s scheduled start and stop times on screen This can be used to help with editing when there is an absence or missing punch Check this box to generate projected time transactions Time forecasting will display future time transactions based on the employee s current schedule on screen and in reports 123 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Pay Periods back Pay Period Key Date Column Totals Reprocess Add Trans Edit Add Start Edit Add Stop Multiple Misc From Schedule Delete O January 2009 Time America Inc Definition Click the scroll arrow and choose the number of pay periods prior to the current one you wish to view NOTE Although you may view prior pay periods only editable pay periods may be changed This is determined by the Number of Editable Pay Periods in Configure Main Company dialog box and the Block Prior Pay Periods setting for the current user Displays the starting date and the ending date of the currently selected pay period Displays the attendance codes which show in the first column Displays totals for each day in the pay period The Totals column displays the totals for the currently selected pay period Click this button to update employee transactions Processing posts new and changed transactions to the database and allows them to be displayed on all reports NOTE If Auto Processing is checked you will not n
143. d how many paid hours are forecasted Enter the start and stop schedule change time for rounding rule purposes only Check this box to make this employee s schedule a template This will enable you to copy this employee s schedule for other employees For more information on this feature see Create an Employee Schedule Template page 126 Check this box to update previous weeks schedule data Also enter the date to which you wish to update For more information on this feature see Assign or Edit an Employee Schedule page 126 Check this box to update following weeks schedule data Also enter the date to which you wish to update For more information on this feature see Assign or Edit an Employee Schedule page 126 Click this button to copy a previously defined schedule template to this employee For more information on this feature see Copy an Employee Schedule Template page 131 Click this button define a rotating schedule for this employee For more information on this feature see Create a Rotating Schedule page 129 Click this button to add multiple or duplicated Miscellaneous transactions This can be used to enter a vacation that lasts several days see Multiple Miscellaneous page 167 This option opens the Delete Assignments screen Here you can remove assignments All Before a Date or All After a Date Assign or Edit an Employee Schedule The processes for assigning a schedule for the first time and for edi
144. d or Delete For more information on this feature see Employee Badges page 150 Defines the user s access rights to the Clocks tab of the Configure Employee section The options are View Add Edit and or Delete For more information on this feature see Employee Clocks page 150 Allows the user to view the Status Board screen For more information on this feature see Status Board page 174 Allows the user to view the Task Organizer screen For more information on this feature see Task Organizer page 174 Allows the user access to the File Global menu from which he she can perform global functions For more information on this feature see Global Commands page 178 Allows the user to access the File Benefits Accruals menu Benefits Accruals are an optional feature and therefore may not be available here The options are View Add Edit and or Delete For more information on this feature see Benefits Accruals page 114 5 The Reports tab grants access to features under the Reports menu and contains the following information O January 2009 Time America Inc 92 TA100 Pro Manual Configure Security Levels Code TC Name TC SUPERVISOR v Active Set Date and Time Print Lists 7 File Daily Operations Reports i System Setup Communication Period Reports Weekly Reports Daily Reports Payroll Export Listings 1 Listed
145. d the name used to refer to Jobs on the Defaults tab of the Main Company dialog box that name will be used in lieu of Jobs For more information see Main Company page 28 Some examples of Jobs might be e Welding e Shipping e Product Development e Work Orders Configure Jobs Jobs are the second level of the Job Costing feature Departments are the top level 1 Click the System Setup menu then Job The Configure Job window will open 2 Listed Code C Name T Show Inactives Add Edit Delete Print Close Figure 60 Configure Job January 2009 Time America Inc 79 TA100 Pro Manual 2 The Configure Job dialog box contains the following information Setting Code Name Active Use Hourly Wage Budgeted Total Hours O January 2009 Time America Inc Definition This is a required field Enter a code to identify the Job The code s length and type numeric or alphanumeric is determined in the Defaults dialog box in the Main Company dialog box see page 28 Once saved this code cannot be changed This is a required field Enter the Job name as it will appear in the system and on reports The Job name can be up to 30 characters long Check this box to indicate that the Job is currently in use Clear this check box if the Job is not being used at this time Check this box to pay all employees assigned to this Job a standard hourly wage whenever they work in this Job Che
146. dates For example if Tuesday is the holiday and you wish to give both Monday and Tuesday off with pay enter the date for both days NOTE No more than two consecutive holidays may be entered if employees must work the day before and the day after the holiday Configure Holidays 1 Click the System Setup menu Holidays The Configure Holidays window will open Configure Holidays 02 25 2009 General Ash Wednesday a Date Wednesday Name Ash Wednesday v Active Y Override Absent Allowed Apply Work Time on this Holiday to Secondary OT Level Holiday Groups Include Code Name LE w 02 Group 02 03 Group 03 04 Group 04 5 Listed Figure 51 Configure Holidays 2 The Configure Holidays dialog box contains the following information Settin Definition Date Enter the date on which the holiday will be observed This is the date on which the Holiday Policies set in Policies will apply O January 2009 Time America Inc 69 TA100 Pro Manual Name Enter the name of the holiday Active Check the Active box to indicate that this holiday will be observed Override Absent Check this box if paid time for this Holiday Allowed should supersede a system generated absence Apply Work Time on Check this box if the holiday is paid at the this Holiday to secondary rate Secondary OT Level Holiday Groups Click the Include box for each group the Holiday w
147. day Monday etc that corresponds to the starting date is used to determine when the cycle begins NOTE This date should be the first of a month in the past that corresponds to the day of the week that the pay period starts on If the pay period is semimonthly specify the number of days in the first half of the policy s semi monthly period Click the down arrow next to the entry field to select a number from 1 to 28 The settings in this section define how punches are processed Enter the number of minutes up to 59 during which duplicate punches on the time clock are ignored When duplicate punches are made within this time frame only the ast punch is used for calculations 44 TA100 Pro Manual Ignore use of opposing function key punches within Missing Out punch limit Will default the Work total to Maximum Out punch link back to In punch First Change Punch accrues to In punch Enter the number of minutes up to 59 in which opposing i e sequential In Out punches on the time clock are ignored For example if 3 minutes is entered here and an employee accidentally punches Out instead of In the employee can enter the In punch within 3 minutes to correct the error and TA100 Pro will ignore the Out punch entirely Enter the number of hours in HH MM format that can pass after the In punch before the system assumes the employee has forgotten to punch out and flags the time and attendance reports F
148. described in the following sections Configure Employee Wages 1 Navigate to the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee page 119 2 Click the Wages tab to display the following information January 2009 Time America Inc 146 TA100 Pro Manual 01231 Timecard Schedule Transactions Status Benefits Messages Badges NM Detail Siddons Kim Active Division ALL z Group far y lt lt Prior Find Next 00001 Washington Carol D0002 Baines Peter 00003 Anderson Frank 00004 Jones David 00005 Smith John rf NON EXEMPT T Use a global wage EXEMPT r Report Hours from Actual L Att se soa Leas _eat Department 3 F eee Le Never t 6 Listed Number C Name Y Show Inactives Print Close Figure 119 Configure Employee Wages tab Settin Non Exempt Definition Check this option to indicate that the employee is Non Exempt Use Global Wage Check this option to assign the employee a fixed standard wage regardless of which department or job he she works for If un checked the employee will earn a different wage based on the department or job they work in For more information see the Department or Job buttons in this section Department Click this button to set a wage that applies whenever the employee works for a particular Department This can be used to pay different rates when the employee
149. dicates the dollars budgeted per day in the pay period Calculate this number by multiplying the number of employees working in the Job by the dollar amount each employee is expected to accumulate in the pay period This number is then divided by the total number of days in the pay period Example 10 employees X 600 dollars per pay period 6000 total dollars 6000 total dollars 7 days in the pay period 857 14 budgeted total dollars Hourly Wage Enter the hourly wage paid to employees working in this Job The Use Hourly Wage check box must be selected for this field to be available Add a Job 1 Click the System Setup menu then Job The Configure Job dialog box will open 2 Click the Add button to add a new Job The General tab will become available Configure Job 0002 XYZ Widgets Code Name M Active F Use Hourly Wage Budgeted Total Hours 0 00 Budgeted Total Dollars 0 0000 0 0000 Hourly wage Kony Gk Cancel Figure 61 Adding a new Job 3 Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Jobs section 4 Click OK to commit the changes and close the Job dialog box 5 Click Close to exit the Configure Job dialog box January 2009 Time America Inc 81 TA100 Pro Manual Edit a Job 1 Click the System Setup menu then Job The Configure Job dialog box will open Highlight the Job you wish to edit from the list at the side of the screen Click the Edit button Th
150. dit Trail history Navigate to the Transactions tab of the Configure Employee window and select the employee you wish to view Highlight the transaction for which you wish to see the Audit Trail Click the Print button A drop down list of Reports associated with this screen will appear By Employee By Date Online Timecard Schedules Transactions gt Badges Wages Profiles Messages Address Quick Status Benefits Job Cost Figure 141 Printing Audit Trails 4 Select Transactions By Employee or By Date The Print Transaction Listing dialog box will open print Transaction isting r DATE RANGE Start 08 20 2001 Mon m OUTPUT TO OPTIONS M Screen Printer I Fie J E mail IV Deleted IV Changed mi at foo foo Stop 08 27 2001 Mon at foo foo D AVAILABLE F 5 SELECTED JONES DAVID 00004 REYNOLDS ADELE 00047 SMITH JOHN 00005 Add all VASHINGTON CAROL 00001 Remove tf Remove all Figure 142 Print Transaction Listing 5 Fill in the settings as appropriate Setting Start At Stop Definition Enter the starting date for the report Enter the starting time for the report Enter the ending date for the report O January 2009 Time America Inc 171 TA100 Pro Manual At Enter the ending time for the report Output to Select the type of report output you wish Screen The report will preview on screen You are then able
151. don t have to reinvent the wheel each time NOTE However any changes that are made to the schedule that was copied will apply to all schedules that are base on that template The Copy Schedule feature allows you to copy a previously defined Template This step is the first step in copying a schedule 1 Navigate to the Schedule tab of the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee Schedules page 125 2 Check the Template box The Define Template dialog box will open Define Template A Define Template A JV Use Employee 00001 as a template Template Name Mon Fri to 4 Cancel Figure 101 Employee Schedule Template Check the Use Employee as template box Enter a name for this template Try to make it as descriptive as possible and avoid using employee names as it may be difficult to remember what type of schedule the employee has 5 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Schedule screen O January 2009 Time America Inc 130 TA100 Pro Manual Copy an Employee Schedule Template The Copy Schedule feature allows you to copy a previously defined Employee Schedule Template See Create an Employee Schedule Template 1 Navigate to the Schedule tab of the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee Schedules page 125 2 Click the Copy button The Schedule Copy Details dialog box will open ENTE COPY SCHEDULE FROM Employee 00001 Code Template Name Display
152. e e Research and Development e Sales and Marketing e Shipping Configure Departments 1 Click the System Setup menu Department The Configure Department window will open Configure Department 0000 Department 00001 Department 00002 Department 00003 h Developmen 4 Listed C Code Name IT Show Inactives Add Edit Delete Print Close Figure 57 Configure Departments 2 The Configure Department dialog box contains the following information January 2009 Time America Inc 75 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Code Name Active Use Hourly Wage O January 2009 Time America Inc Definition This is a required field Enter a code to identify the department The code s length and type numeric or alphanumeric is determined in the Defaults dialog box in the Main Company dialog box see Main Company page 28 Once saved this code cannot be changed This is a required field Enter the department name as it will appear in the system and on reports The department name can be up to 30 characters long Check this box to indicate that the department is currently in use Clear this check box if the department is not being used at this time Check this box to pay all employees assigned to this department a standard hourly wage whenever they work in this department Checking this box will enable the Hourly Wage field in which you define the amount of the wage NOTE
153. e You must configure the Export tab settings to specify field mappings for your payroll export See Step 3 38 TA100 Pro Manual Hours Dollars Miscellaneous entry overrides absence Miscellaneous entry overrides holiday minimum hours Are miscellaneous entries paid Can this category be overtime Post to benefit entitlement This is a required field Select either Hours or Dollars to indicate the category type For example the category VACATION collects hour amounts while the categories TIP1 and TIP2 collect dollar amounts If Hours is selected complete the remaining fields that apply If Dollars is selected the remaining fields in this dialog box are unavailable Select this option to allow a Miscellaneous entry of this category to override an absence Miscellaneous refers to an entry other than Work Allows time in this category to count toward the minimum hours worked requirement for allocating paid holiday time Miscellaneous refers to an entry other than Work Allows time in this category to be treated as paid time Select this option if employees will be paid when receiving a miscellaneous entry using this category Miscellaneous refers to an entry other than Work This option will only be available if miscellaneous entries are paid Select this option to accrue time in this category towards overtime Clearing this option causes the system to prohibit overtime calculation on th
154. e 187 Windows Date Time Properties If necessary edit the date and time to be accurate and click OK Click the Set Time button to commit the changes When TA100 Pro has finished sending the Date and Time to clock click Close to exit the dialog box O January 2009 Time America Inc 237 TA100 Pro Manual Chapter XII Terminal Polling and AutoProcessing This section describes the concepts and techniques associated with polling clocks and setting up Auto Processes Polling is the process of communicating data to and from the clock including transferring employee time transactions and other data from the clocks to the host computer PC for processing Clocks can be manually polled or automatically polled on a pre defined schedule AutoProcessing allows certain common tasks to be run automatically Polling Reports custom files and Reindexing can set to Auto Process Polling Polling Time Clocks Polling is the process of communicating data back and forth between the clock and TA100 Pro Polling can be done manually which means a supervisor or administrator must launch the TA100 Pro software and request that the clock be polled Polling may also be set as an auto process which means that the TA100 Pro is responsible for communicating with the clock on a pre defined schedule This section describes how to poll the clock manually 1 Click the Communications menu Poll The Pol Clock Selection dialog box will open Pol
155. e Bell Schedules 1 Click the System Setup menu Bell Schedules The Configure Bells window will open Configure Bells DListed Name I Show Inactives Add Edi Delete Frit Close Figure 63 Configure Bells 2 The Configure Bells dialog box contains the following information Setting Definition Number This is a required field Enter a 4 digit number to identify the bell schedule Once saved this number cannot be changed Name This is a required field The bell schedule name can be up to 30 characters long Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the Bell Schedule is currently in use Uncheck this box if the Schedule is not being used at this time Schedules Lists the individual bell days and times entered Number Indicates the order the bells will ring SMTWTFS Indicates the day s of the week the bell will ring January 2009 Time America Inc 83 TA100 Pro Manual Time Indicates the time at which the bell will ring Duration Indicates how long the bell will ring Day of Week Indicates the day s of the week the bell selected in the Schedules list will ring Time Indicates the time at which the bell selected in the Schedules list will ring Duration Indicates how long the bell selected in the Schedules list will ring Add a Bell Schedule 1 Click the System Setup menu Bell Schedules The Configure Bell Schedule dialog box will open Click the Add button to add a
156. e General screen will become available for you to edit the selected Job NOTE The Code field cannot be edited 4 Edit the settings as described in the Configure Jobs section Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Job screen Click Close to exit the Configure Job dialog box Delete a Job Jobs that are in use cannot be deleted 1 Click the System Setup menu then Job The Configure Job dialog box will open Highlight the Job you wish to delete from the list at the side of the screen Click the Delete button You will be prompted xi 2 Are you sure you want to delete Figure 62 Deletion Confirmation 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion 5 Click Close to exit the Configure Job dialog box January 2009 Time America Inc 82 TA100 Pro Manual Bell Schedules The Bell Schedules is an optional module that allows your Time clock to activate a bell at specified times of day For example you might have a bell ring to announce the start of a shift break or lunch and the end of the day The bell schedule is defined by the day of the week the time of day and the duration of the bell The Bell Schedules module can ring up to 336 bells per Time clock per week Each Bell Schedule template can contain multiple bell details Once the Bell Schedule has been created you will add the individual dates and times the bells will ring The Bell Schedule is then downloaded to the appropriate Time clocks Configur
157. e a Shift Group Add a Shift Edit a Shift 1 Or OO ON Boe Click the System Setup menu Shift The Configure Shift Group dialog box will open Highlight the Shift Group you wish to delete from the list at the side of the screen Click the Delete button You will be prompted xi 2 Are you sure you want to delete Figure 49 Deletion Confirmation Click OK to confirm the deletion Click Close to exit the Configure Shift Group dialog box Click the System Setup menu Shift The Configure Shift dialog box will open Click the Add button next to the Shift Details window to add a new Shift The Details tab will become available Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Shift section Click OK to commit the changes and close the Shift dialog box Click on the Differential tab to add a shift differential Click the Add button Enter the From and To in HH MM Select the Day and Differential number that will apply to this shift Click Close to exit the Configure Shift dialog box Click the System Setup menu Shift The Configure Shift dialog box will open January 2009 Time America Inc 66 TA100 Pro Manual 2 Highlight the Shift you wish to edit from the list in the center of the Groups screen 3 Click the Edit button next to the Shift Details window The Details screen will become available for you to edit the selected Shift Edit the settings as described in the Configure Shift section Cl
158. e clock s time this field compensates for time zone differences between the computer s location and the clock s location When the clock s time is set the system either adds or subtracts this time difference from the computer s clock A setting of 0 indicates that the clock and computer are in the same time zone Select the company division where the clock is located Every transaction entered on this clock is tagged with this division code 210 TA100 Pro Manual Supervisor Default Date Default Time Input Initial Source Swipe Key Bar Code Employee Badge Source By Supervisor Swipe Key Bar Code These options define supervisor settings for the clock Check this box to automatically use the clock s current date for transactions added using a supervisor s badge When this check box is clear the clock prompts the supervisor for the date of any new transactions Check this box to automatically use the clock s current time for transactions added using a supervisor s badge When this check box is clear the clock prompts the supervisor for the time of any new transactions These settings determine how data can put entered into the clock Check the applicable check box es to indicate the method by which an employee badge number is entered into the clock The employee s badge number can be entered by swiping a badge The employee s badge number can be entered by pressing keys on t
159. e code 4EIWEH B on the outer shell The following restrictions are present when TA100 Pro detects the Demo Key e The TA100 Pro software is limited to five employees and two users e NOT FOR RESALE is displayed on all screens January 2009 Time America Inc 17 TA100 Pro Manual Chapter Ill Getting Started This section explains how to launch the TA100 Pro system including logging on and off using Help using the keyboard instead of the mouse and customizing the TA100 Pro environment Starting TA100 Pro and Logging In Note on User Accounts When starting TA100 Pro you will be prompted for a User ID and password The User ID and password are used to determine who is able to login and what areas of the program are accessible These User Accounts are defined in the Security Access portion of TA100 Pro which will be covered later in this manual SYSOP There is a built in administrator account that grants full access to all parts of the application The User ID for this account is SYSOP and the initial password is password This password can and should be changed This account will be referred to as SYSOP throughout this manual The first time you login you must use the SYSOP account as no other accounts exist You will also use this account to perform system maintenance etc The SYSOP account can perform all functions within TA100 Pro including certain database management functions that no other account can access
160. e files This utility is useful when databases become corrupted beyond recovery NOTE This utility completely deletes ALL data in the selected databases Only the SYSOP is able to initialize data 1 Click the File menu Utilities Initialize Databases The nitialize Selection dialog box will open Initialize Selection ACRLACUM DBF Adi JACRLADJ DBF Add ACRLCAT DBF IACRLDET DBF iua ACRLTOT DBF ARPTINFO DBF ARPTSEL DBF ARPTUSER DBF 109 Available OSelected OF Cancel Figure 204 Initialize Selection January 2009 Time America Inc 254 TA100 Pro Manual 2 Select the database you wish to Initialize by clicking Add to select an individual database or Add All to add all 3 Click OK to begin the process ALL DATA IN THE SELECTED TABLES WILL BE DESTROYED Change Employee Number Once an employee has been added to the system you can no longer change his or her employee number through the Configure Employees Detail screen This utility allows you to change employee numbers one employee at a time 1 Click the File menu Utilities Change Employee Number The Change Employee Number dialog box will open La Change Employee Number Figure 205 Change Employee Number 2 Select the employee whose number you wish to change using the drop down list in the Old field 3 Enter the new employee number in the New field 4 Click OK to change the employee s number Change Employee
161. e report as the Report Print command sends the report directly to the printer without prompting you to choose a printer The following instructions describe how to change your TA100 Pro printer Configure Printer 1 Click the File menu Print The Print Setup dialog box will open Printer E Printer Name A Laser Status Ready Type LANIER MP C3500 LD435c PCL 6 Where 1P_10 10 10 31 Comment Figure 155 Print Setup 2 Using the Name drop down box select the pre defined printer to which you wish to print 3 Click OK to commit the changes and exit the dialog box The TA100 Pro printer will be changed and reports will now print to it O January 2009 Time America Inc 182 TA100 Pro Manual Running a Report The basics of running reports are the same from report to report Some reports may prompt for additional information that is particular to that specific report but most have standard settings The Reports are organized into categories to make them easier to find The categories are Most reports can be run by Range allowing you to select a range of items or employees or Period Timecards Who s Scheduled Coverage and other Period oriented reports Weekly Weekly Hours Attendance Approaching Overtime Weekly oriented reports Daily Who s in Who s not in Daily Hours and other Daily oriented reports Payroll Exports Runs the Payroll Export Listings Lists and setup definitions for your TA1
162. e used to communicate with the clock The factory default is COM 1 This is the Direct connection RS232 in the Communication Path field e RS232 Baud 19200 for all clocks These settings become available when LAN has been chosen as the communication type in the Communication Path field The default is 19200 baud Make sure the baud rate selected here matches the baud rate defined at the clock All clocks use 19200 for LAN Enter the clock s unique identification number in this field This number provides a way for the system to distinguish between individual clocks Any one character alphabetic or numeric ID may be used Make sure the LAN ID defined here matches the LAN ID defined at the clock These settings define how an Ethernet clock will communicate with TA100 Pro Enter the IP address assigned to the Etherlink converter DO NOT enter leading zeros Displays the port used on the Etherlink Converter The default is 3734 and should not be changed Altering this number will result in communication failure and the possibility of only being able to connect to the Etherlink Converter serially These settings define how a modem clock will communicate with TA100 Pro 209 TA100 Pro Manual Baud Rate Phone Number Start Stop Answer Ring Delay Number of Retries Time Difference Between Computer and Clock Division O January 2009 Time America Inc Select the modem s communication speed Make s
163. ears in the Online Time Card and allows you to add Miscellaneous transactions on multiple days This option is easiest when you are adding several days of the same category for example for a weeklong vacation or per diems for a business trip January 2009 Time America Inc 167 TA100 Pro Manual 1 Navigate to the Online Timecard for the employee you wish to edit See Online Timecard page 160 2 Click the Multiple Misc button The Multiple Miscellaneous Transaction dialog box will open Multiple Miscellaneous Transaction Miscellaneous Information Febuay 2009 Une 07 00 00 4 SUN MON TUE WED THU FRI SAT VAC VACATION Hours Y 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 add O subtract HH MM 08 00 Amount C Accrue towards overtime Differential 00010203 Job Cost Level Override Apply OK Cancel Figure 138 Multiple Miscellaneous 3 Fill in the settings as appropriate Setting Definition Time Enter the start time for this miscellaneous transaction If AM PM has been activated from Main Company will require selection Category Select the category for this transaction Add Subtract Select Add to add the number of hours or dollars in the next field Select Subtract to deduct the number of hours or dollars in the next field HH MM If an Hours category was selected this field will become available Enter the number of hours for this transaction in decimal format Amount If a Dollars category w
164. edule NOTE TA100 Pro must be running for the Auto Process to work You may minimize the TA100 Pro window O January 2009 Time America Inc 244 TA100 Pro Manual NOTE For network installs you will need to check that the network is not doing any backups or running any utilities during the auto processing schedule Run Reports AutoProcess 1 If Run Reports is selected choose the report s you wish to run by double clicking each report to tag it and filling in the report settings The Report Parameters dialog box for the selected report will open 2 Fillin the Report Parameters windows as described in the Run Reports section 3 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Auto Process Screen 4 Click Start to activate the Auto Process schedule Run a File AutoProcess 1 If Run a File is selected you will be prompted to choose the file program etc to run 2 When all settings are complete click OK The AutoProcess will begin on the next occurrence of the date and time specified in the AutoProcess Schedule Details 3 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Auto Process Screen 4 Click Start to activate the Auto Process schedule Edit an Auto Process 1 Click the Communications menu AutoProcess The Configure Auto Process dialog box will open Auto Process Maintenance Number 0001 Name Poling Time Description SMTUTFS Type 00 00 TASZO Clock YYYYYYY Clock 2
165. edule 1 Navigate to the Schedule tab of the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee Schedules page 125 2 Click the Delete button You will be prompted Delete Assignments OK Cancel Figure 99 Deletion Confirmation 3 Fill in the settings as appropriate Settin Definition All Before Date Select this option to delete schedules leading up to a certain date All After Date Select this option to delete schedules occurring after a certain date Date Enter the date to consider when deleting the schedules January 2009 Time America Inc 128 TA100 Pro Manual 4 Click OK You will be prompted again Confirm Delete WARNING Delete will remove 5 Click OK to confirm the deletion Create a Rotating Schedule Rotating schedules allow you to accommodate employees who work schedules that have a pattern other than a weekly cycle You can specify the number of days in the rotation and what time period the rotation begins Rotating Schedule Example Jane Doe works every other Saturday She happens to work this coming Saturday and will be off the next Saturday To configure this you would modify her schedule so that Work is checked for this Saturday but not the next Saturday The Start Date for the Rotation would be the beginning of the current week and the number of days in the cycle would be 14 1 Navigate to the Schedule tab of the Configure Employee window See Co
166. ee Benefits Configure Employee Benefits Benefit Det Configure Employee Benefits Benefit Det Configure Employee Employee Configure Employee Employee Example Configure Employee Messages Configure Employee Messages All Clock Fnnfinure F mninuer Massanes Messana E amp Display Figure 21 gt Configure Employee Definition The workers that make your company run are identified as Employees or by some other term as defined in the Main Company Defaults throughout the TA100 system Since they most likely will not work for free they must be entered into the system before their accrued hours can be tracked Employees are the people that make the business world work If they are to be paid for their labor they must be entered into the system for tracking TA100 views each employee separately and keeps track of hours worked benefits accrued auantities produced etc hd Help Article 1 Click the Print button on the TA100 Pro Help toolbar The Print window will open January 2009 Time America Inc 24 TA100 Pro Manual p General Options Select Printer Genesis PDF Maker Z Lanier Color Laser on tadom1 ES AS A AS lt Microsoft Office Document Ime E HP LaserJet 8000 on tadom1 Qs Microsoft XPS Document Writer lt gt Status Ready Print to file Location Comment Find Printer Page Range all Number of copies 1 F O Pages 1 H
167. ee window See Configure Employee page 119 2 Click the Schedule tab to select The tab contains the following information Configure Employee 00001 Timecard Schedule Transactions Status Benefits Messages Wages Badges Detail Washington Carol 2004 Active Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday 27 28 29 30 31 January 1 j 0700 1500 0700 1500 0700 1500 0700 1500 0001 Division ALL me 7 0 0001 0001 0001 Group ALL o he NONE NONE N NONE NONE 8 00 8 00 8 00 8 00 8 00 Next gt gt J 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 4 00002 Baines Peter 00003 Anderson Frank 00004 Jones David 00005 Smith John 00006 James Monroe 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0700 1500 0700 1500 0700 1500 0700 1500 0700 1500 0700 1500 0700 1500 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE Work Y Work 8 00 Work 8 00 v work 8 00 v Work 8 00 Iv Work 8 00 Work 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 14 5 0700 1500 0700 1500 0001 0001 NONE NONE 9 10 0700 1500 0700 1500 NONE NONE NO 8 00 8 00 8 00 8 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 Use as a template v Update Back Fri Update Forward Fri
168. eed to use this button each time a transaction is changed Click this button to add a transaction punch for the employee For more information on this feature see Adding and Editing Transactions page 162 Click this button to add or edit a Starting transaction such as a Clock In for day or Start Lunch for the employee For more information on this feature see Edit Add Start page 166 Click this button to add or edit an Ending transaction such as a Clock Out for day or End Lunch for the employee For more information on this feature see Edit Add Stop page 167 Click this button to add multiple or duplicated Miscellaneous transactions This can be used to enter a vacation that lasts several days etc For more information on this feature see Multiple Miscellaneous page 167 Click this button to auto fill a work day based on the employee s schedule For more information on this feature see From Schedule page 169 Click this button to delete a transaction For more information on this feature see Delete a Transaction page 169 124 TA100 Pro Manual Employee Schedule Tab The Schedule tab displays and allows you to edit the employee s schedule NOTE Employees are not required to have a specific schedule but without a schedule the following items will not work in the system e Rounding Rules e Automatic Lunch and Break Deductions e Exceptions Configure Employee Schedules 1 Navigate to the Configure Employ
169. eeeeeeetteeeeeeee 179 LANMSactiONS ee 180 Global Wages Oe lete ici yn li 149 Ot igh Ae eet ede A Des aes 148 GIOUPS 12248 ita alas ead a aL 72 OG ON 73 A A 72 delete iii Sree 74 ly a 73 Hand Reader oanien a iiid 229 CONTIQUIS estes amaari aa raaa aa tds 229 Hardware keys additional polling oooonnncccnonnncccnnnnccccccnno January 2009 Time America Inc demonstration demo 17 System KBY coccconnocccoccccnonccccanccnnnnnnnnancnnnncnnns 16 Hardware requirement oooonocccccnnnocccccononccinnnn 10 Helprint ia iaa 23 Contents cai 23 SOM 24 NAEK dad 23 ONIING sea ii i e 23 O hte ta aae aeS 24 Historical data enetan a e 259 Holidays ee is 69 OOO tek tetas eet at atin etre Heal ee a 70 CONMQUICS doctoral ed tae eee 69 configure pay options 0 ee 46 A E ae 72 136 A atin Belt at E ae 70 MOPON aaae a EE 247 Advanced cuicos 247 WTA ZO css teenie taaa a a 254 Installation 10 hardware KCYS coooccccococccccononcccnanancnncnnnnnnnnnnons 16 INSTUCIONS aiii 10 system requirements ooccccnnccccnnnnoccccnnnonccnnns 10 Job Costing AOS cit ii 81 configure JODS oooooncccncccnnoccnoncccconnnnanananancncnno 79 delete JODS eotea tiy 82 SATION Sonsan a ea AR 82 Jobs Ele lo AEA E A T 81 COMIQUIS oa a ee E ar decease 79 ce gt 2 gt ii ora E 82 O eee rete DO 82 ROYDO Mita aia 21 Keyboard usage programmed KeYS cooooocccccococccccononnccccnnnccnnnnns 22 Shortcut KCYS ccoooonocccccnnnoccccnononcccnanarncnn
170. een Benefit Entitlement Delete a Detail 1 Navigate to the Benefits tab of the Configure Employee window 2 Click the Details button The Benefit Details screen will display 3 Highlight the item you wish to delete 4 Click the Delete button You will be prompted xi 7 Are you sure you want to delete Figure 110 Deletion Confirmation 5 Click OK to confirm the deletion 6 Click OK to confirm the Archive message 7 Click Close to return to the Benefits screen January 2009 Time America Inc 139 TA100 Pro Manual Benefit Accruals Configure 1 Navigate to the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee page 119 2 Click the Benefits tab to display the following information Configure Employee 0001 Associate Test emplate Friar Find Next gt gt Associate Test Dunaway Fae Redford Robert 0053 Wayne John 0023 4 Listed C Number Name T Show Inactives Timecard Schedule Transactions Status Benefis Messages Wages Badges nu Deta Fiscal Date 05 21 1998 Hire Date 06 08 1998 1408 Days of Service PERS PERSONAL DAY SICK SICK PAID 0 00 o WAC VACATION 146 67 0 00 0 00 146 67 Oo 06 08 2001 Description Allowed Taken Pending Left Count Carry date 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 o 06 08 200 2 00 0 00 2 00 O 06 08 2001 0 00 00 0 00 Oo 01 01 2002 Print Close Figure 111 Configure Employee Benefits tab Setting Fiscal Date Hire
171. elect employees based on Division Employees selected are assigned the default Authority and Verification automatically NOTE If you use this method to choose employees you may want to Edit the employee in order to choose another Authority and Verification Group Click this button to select employees based on Group Employees selected are assigned the default Authority and Verification automatically NOTE If you use this method to choose employees you may want to Edit the employee in order to choose another Authority and Verification Remove All Click this button to remove all employees currently assigned to the clock Add All Click this button to assign all employees to the clock Employees selected are assigned the default Authority and Verification automatically NOTE If you use this method to choose employees you may want to Edit the employee in order to choose another Authority and Verification January 2009 Time America Inc 215 TA100 Pro Manual Messaging Since multiple clocks can be defined in the TA100 Pro a copy feature is available to copy an existing clock s parameters when adding a new clock This eliminates the need to re enter an Setting Add Definition You will be prompted to select the following Authority The Authority Level defines which clock menus employee can view or use at the clock The following options are available Employee Supervisor or Configuration Verification The
172. elected are assigned the default Policy and Department automatically NOTE If you use this method to choose employees you may want to Edit the employee in order to choose another Policy or Department Click this button to select employees based on Group Employees selected are assigned the default Policy and Department automatically NOTE If you use this method to choose employees you may want to Edit the employee in order to choose another Policy or Department Click this button to remove all employees currently assigned to the clock Click this button to assign all employees to the clock Employees selected are assigned the default Policy and Department automatically NOTE If you use this method to choose employees you may want to Edit the employee in order to choose another Policy or Department 225 TA100 Pro Manual Add Click this button to select employees individually You will be prompted to select the TASC Policy as defined on the previous tab and Department Edit Click this button to edit the employee s badge number policy or department Delete Click this button to remove the employee from the list 5 The Diag Info tab contains the communication information between the computer and the clock after each attempt to communicate 6 The Prof Info tab contains the information that was sent to the clock after any type of programming ATS Series Clocks TA100 Pro offers a module that allows it to c
173. elected list Remove All removes all of the Groups from the Selected list Add a User 1 Click the File menu Security User Maintenance The Configure Users dialog box will open 2 Click the Add button to add a new User The User tab will become available O January 2009 Time America Inc 101 TA100 Pro Manual Edit a User Delete a User T 1 00 00 N O OY Es 99 Configure Users SYSOP OPERATOR SYSTEM Active Users lo isons Proa y User Login Password reee Supervisor Badge I Active Name Last First r Security Level SUPERVISOR SUPERVISOR LEVEL z Startup Start in Mainmenu Optimize for Updated Data El r E mail E mail Profile Apply GF Cancel Figure 80 Adding a new User Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Users section Click Apply to commit the changes Click on the Divisions tab Click Apply to commit the changes Click on the Groups tab Click OK Click Close to exit the Configure Users dialog box Click the File menu Security User Maintenance The Configure Users dialog box will open Highlight the User you wish to edit from the list Click the Edit button The tabs will become available for you to edit NOTE The Login field cannot be edited Edit the settings as described in the Configure User section Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure User screen Click Close to e
174. election 2 Use the drop down to select in the From box to select the first Division you wish to choose 3 Use the drop down to select in the To box to select the first Division you wish to choose TIP To choose a single Division select the same Division in both boxes 4 Click OK to accept the changes and return to the dialog box All employees in the selected Division will appear in the Selected list on the right Global Message Assignment Global Message Assignment allows you to create a customized message that will display when employees punch at the clock This is an easy way to send the same message to multiple employees at once For example you might send a message that says Welcome or display the employee s name after punching 1 Click the Daily Operations menu Global Message Assignment The Global Message Assignment dialog box will open January 2009 Time America Inc 179 TA100 Pro Manual Global Message Assignment 5 Available 0 Selected Que Figure 150 Global Message Assignment 2 Select the employee s to whom you wish to send the message using the techniques described above see Selecting Employees in Global Operation Dialog Boxes page 178 3 Click the Details button The Global Message Assignment Details dialog box will open Global Message Assignment Details Add v v V Default message to Employee name Message Cancel Figure 151 Global Message Assignment Detai
175. elow January 2009 Time America Inc 266 TA100 Pro Manual Registered to ABC Manufacturing Company Serial Number T499999999 10 Version Number 3 01d Employee Limit 800 User Limit 5 Third Party Terminals Installed Auto Process Installed Bells Installed PC Clock Installed Benefit Accruals Installed FOR ASSISTANCE CONTACT Time America Inc 51 West Third Street Suite 310 empe AZ 85281 Hand Reader Activation Copyright 1989 2004 Time America Inc All rights reserved System Configuration The System Configuration screen displays the technical setup of your computer 1 Click the Help menu System Configuration The System Configuration window will open System Configuration i x Operating System windows NT 5 00 Processor in use Pentium Graphics card monitor Color Color Current directory CAGENPRO Printer status READY Total free memory 534 708 224 bytes Memory used 1 130 868 bytes Base RAM available 655 360 bytes Data drive capacity 5 992 693 760 bytes Disk space remaining 2 248 859 648 bytes Figure 219 System Configuration 2 Press Esc to exit the dialog box Conversion Table The Conversion Table displays conversions from 12 Hour to 24 Hours and minutes to hundredths of an hour 1 Click the Help menu Conversion Table The Conversion Table will open O January 2009 Time America Inc 267 TA100 Pro Manual Time Conversion Table lol x
176. en 4 After the email is processed click the Close button until you have exited all the dialog boxes 5 You can view the sent email from the sent mail folder of your email program for example MS Outlook s Sent Items folder The email will appear something like this TIME CARD REPORT Message Plain Text b 10 x Eile Edit view Insert Format Tools Actions Help J Jae 1 e Es EE as S AAA ant oros A This message has not been sent adeler timeamerica com ce Subject rme CARD REPORT Attached is the Time Card Report that was run at 08 28 2001 08 05 48 T Timecard pdf 13KB Figure 167 Example Emailed Report January 2009 Time America Inc 196 TA100 Pro Manual Chapter XI Terminal Configuration This section covers the concepts and tasks associated with setting up clocks TA100 Pro Supports the use of three types of clocks TA520 530 TA620 PC Clock and TASC Support for ATS and Hand Reader Videx DuraTrax clocks is available in additional modules For each clock the following parameters must be defined e Communication Type RS232 RS485 Internal External modem or Ethernet e PC Comm Port used for communication e Baud Rate e Default Levels e Bell Schedule if applicable 55 TA100 PRO Time America Inc File Daily Operations Reports System Setup Communications Help 8 SF FA el ee Set Date and Time na Configure
177. ents can be additions or deductions to the employee s available benefits You can also use this feature to zero out the employee s balance called a balance adjustment 1 Navigate to the Benefits tab of the Configure Employee window See Benefit Accruals Configure page 140 Click the Details button The Benefit Details screen will display Click the Manual Adj Button The Manual Adjustment dialog box will open January 2009 Time America Inc 142 TA100 Pro Manual Day Date Time Amount Balance Category oL 0 000000 SICK Ca Sat 01 01 2000 00 00 00 000000 r Fri 01 01 1999 00 00 00 0 000000 0 000000 SICK Carry Over NO Date MPAJA SUN Timefi7 51 57 Type of Adjustment C Balance Give Hours 0 000000 DK Cancel Y Show Accrued Adjustments Print Delete 6 Close Figure 113 Manual Benefit Adjustment 4 Fill in the settings as appropriate Settin Definition Date Enter the Date on which the adjustment should be posted Time Enter the time at which the adjustment should be posted Type Select the type of adjustment to be made Given Grants the employee the number of hours entered in the Amount field Balance Adjusts the employee s Allowed field value to cause the current Left balance to reflect the number of hours entered in the Amount field For example if the Employee had taken 40 hours already and you wanted their balance to reflect 40 hours left TA100 Pro would adjust t
178. eral payroll policy parameters and contains the following information Configure Policies 001 Standard Policy 001 Standard Policy E ensa 115 gt Neme Actives Figure 36 Policies General tab January 2009 Time America Inc 43 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Code Name Active Pay Period Weekly Bi weekly Semimonthly Monthly Start Date Number of Days in semimonthly period Punch Defaults Ignore use of duplicate function key punches within January 2009 Time America Inc Definition This field is required Enter a code up to 3 alphanumeric characters to identify the policy Once saved this code cannot be changed This field is required Type the company policy name as it will appear in the system and on reports The policy name can be up to 30 characters long Click the Active check box to indicate that the policy is currently in use Clear this check box if the policy is not being used at this time Select the appropriate pay period information for your company Check this option if wages are paid weekly Check this option if wages are paid every other week Check this option if wages are paid twice a month Check this option if wages are paid once a month Enter the starting date of the pay period using MM DD YYYY format This is used for calculations and represents the starting date of an entire payroll period The day of the week Sun
179. escription Access Windows Start Stop Day of the Week Definition Displays the number of the Time Zones There are 60 available Time Zones Each time zone can have up to four Access Windows Enter a description for each Time Zone These settings determine the times or windows during which the clock can be used Enter the time at which the clock will start accepting punches The time must be entered in military time The default value is 00 00 TIP To indicate that the clock can accept punches all day enter 00 00 in the Start and 23 59 in the stop Enter the time at which the clock will stop accepting punches The time must be entered in military time The default value is 00 00 TIP To indicate that the clock can accept punches all day enter 00 00 in the Start and 23 59 in the stop Check the day s of the week each Access Window will be in effect 4 The Assignments tab lists the employees that can use this clock This is necessary because the Hand Reader clocks take measurements of an employee s hand Each time the employee punches the reader compares the employee s hand to the existing template Employee information and hand templates are stored in the Hand Reader clock For this reason employees must be assigned to a clock so their name and template will be downloaded to the correct clock The tab contains the following information O January 2009 Time America Inc 232 TA100 Pro Manual Co
180. eseeseneeeeeeeeees 229 Hand Reader configure cconococcconocccccco 229 PONO isra ctas 238 TA500 600 Series n 198 208 TA500 600 Series configure 198 208 216 TAS tn das 218 TASC configure coooooccocococcccononononocnnnnnnnnnnnnos 219 COnfiQuratiOn cecceceeeeeceseeeeeeeteeeetaeeeeeeeees 27 Bell Schedules ocococcccccccncncncnicicininnnos 83 114 A ruianiitei iiia 105 114 A ea eee 37 Department oococinnnnnococcconinicnnanannoncnncnnns 75 79 DIVISIONS util e 34 Groups iian akao ain einai hee 72 FLO AYS cito 69 Main Company coccccccoccnononananoncnancnnnnnnnnanancnnnos 28 Policies cian 43 eA E E E ee liens 86 A Ee E E NE A 56 Configure Users ocooococoncccconccccconccoconcnnncnnnanananns 97 Databases INTIAlIZO eri nth A 254 o A ER a ieee teers 253 re PAI aE TES 253 UP CALC PAEA E ii 254 Demonstration demo key n 17 Department naiean nnti aaia aaiae a 75 79 alo lo O 78 CONNUES arrenar a ar ee 75 Oelete stance e 78 lluita 78 Differential configure ei ciooiaciaciis 52 DIVISION Soares 34 ete e E A E AE 35 COMU Oui iso nE 34 CCl C1G 5 5 oie cin eA ee 35 A acai E EE hedee carters evita Ay 35 Edit Add Start cceeceececeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 166 Edit Add Stop eeeceeeeeeseeeeeeseeceeeeeeeeaeeeeneeeees 167 Editing time recordS ooocccconoccccccononcccnanancninnnns 160 EMMalll 68052 catssareier a a A E E AAS 195 Employee Details CONT LOKS A 155 Employee info coconccccnnncconocic
181. f your TA100 Pro software The name and version of the Operating System The type of network being used if applicable The model number and EPROM revision of the data collection terminal s used with the TA100 Pro software The name of all software options and or modules installed The make and model of the host computer PC The operations being performed when the problem occurred A printout of any error message that was displayed O January 2009 Time America Inc 9 TA100 Pro Manual Chapter ll Installation This section describes how to install the TA 100 Pro software the Sentinel System Driver and attach the hardware key System Requirements To use the TA100 Pro system the following are the recommended minimum system requirements must be present e Windows 95 98 2000 NT ME XP e Pentium III 500 or better e 128MB of total memory RAM e Amouse trackball or other pointing device Additional Requirements e 500MB of available disk space either on a workstation or accessible on a network drive e NOTE A dedicated database server is not required e Additional disk space and an enhanced wide area network connection may be required based on the number of employees network distance communication method and the amount of live data contained in the system Polling PC e An available serial port with a default address and interrupt e An available parallel port Installing the System NOTE Do not laun
182. figure Policies 001 Standard Policy General Holidays Overtime Bilferenia Exceptions Use Differential Differential Type Amount 1 Addition C Multiplier 0 0000 2 Addition C Multiplier 0 0000 3 Addition Multiplier 0 0000 I Differential fixed to IN Apply OK Cancel Figure 39 Policies Differential tab Setting Use Differential Differential Type Amount Differential fixed to In January 2009 Time America Inc Definition Check this option to enable the shift differentials There are nine differential codes available Select the type of differential Addition Select this option to add a specific dollar amount to the employee s regular wage Multiplier Select this option to multiply the employee s regular wage by a multiplication factor Enter the amount of the differential If the type is Addition enter the amount in dollars and cents that should be paid above the employee s regular wage for differential hours i e 30 for 30 cents per hour If the type is Multiplier enter the percentage or factor to multiply the employee s regular wage for differential hours i e 1 5 for time and a half Check this option to pay an employee a differential premium only when he she punches n within the time frame s specified in Shift Maintenance Clear this check box to pay an employee a differential premium if any part of the hours falls within the time
183. ge ANDE To OAI O Range To Gal O Range To Gall O Range To 3 Close Figure 157 Report Parameter Selection 6 Fill in the settings as appropriate Settin Pay Period Pay Periods Back Select Policy Period Special O January 2009 Time America Inc Definition Select this option to run the report for a pay period You will need to fill in the rest of the pay period options that become available when the option is selected Policy Select the policy that contains the pay period definition you wish to use Pay Periods Back Enter the number of pay periods in the past for which to run the report Verify the dates shown in the Start and Stop fields TIP Entering 0 will run the report for the current pay period Enter the number of pay periods in the past for which to run the report Verify the dates shown in the Start and Stop fields TIP Entering 0 will run the report for the current pay period Click this button to select the Policy that contains the pay period definition you wish to use Displays the number of the selected Policy Displays the pay period frequency weekly biweekly etc Select this option to enter the date range manually 184 TA100 Pro Manual Start Stop Yesterday Today Forecasting Reprocess Employees All Range O January 2009 Time America Inc The purpose of this field changes depending upon which Date Range option has been chosen If Spe
184. gure Employee section The options are View Add Edit and or Delete and will allow the user access to employee records lf Add Edit and Delete are turned off the Detail Tab is also off For more information on this feature see Employee Maintenance page 114 Details w o Add Defines the user s access to the Details tab Edit Delete of the Configure Employee section This is a view only feature unless Add Edit and Delete have been activated in the above Employee section Timecard Defines the user s access rights to the Timecard tab of the Configure Employee section The options are View Add Edit and or Delete and will allow the user access to employee time sheet data For more information on this feature see Employee Timecard page 120 O January 2009 Time America Inc 90 TA100 Pro Manual Approve Timecard Schedule Allow Schedule Override Transactions Status Benefits Messages Wages January 2009 Time America Inc Defines the user s access to approve timecards in the Timecard tab of the Configure Employee section Defines the user s access rights to the Schedule tab of the Configure Employee section The options are View Edit and Delete and will allow the user access to the employee s schedule For more information on this feature see Employee Schedule page 125 Defines the user s access to create new shifts as a shift override on the Schedule tab of the Configure Employee sec
185. happens to be the order in which they appear on the Configure menu in the TA100 Pro Main Window This order is e Main Company e Divisions optional e Categories e Policies e Shifts e Holidays e Groups optional e Department e Job e Security e Bell Schedules e Benefit Accruals January 2009 Time America Inc 27 TA100 Pro Manual Main Company The Main Company window is where you identify your company define the overall configuration of the system and specify the payroll service to which time and attendance data will be exported 1 Click the System Setup menu Company Main Company The Main Company window will open and the General tab will be selected by default Configure Main Company General Configure Defaults Exports Company Details Name TIME AMERICA INC Address 15990 N GREENWAY HAYDEN LOOP Address SUITE D 500 City SCOTTSDALE State AZ Zip Code 85260 Phone Number 480 374 7700 Fax Number 480 682 0935 E Print OK Cancel Figure 25 Main Company General tab 2 Fill in the settings as appropriate Settin Name Address Address City State Zip Phone Number Fax Number Definition Enter your company s name This field is required and can contain up to 30 characters Enter the first line of your company s primary address This field can accept up to 30 characters NOTE Divisions can be used to allow for additional branch addresse
186. he Main Company configuration dialog box January 2009 Time America Inc 33 TA100 Pro Manual Divisions Divisions are subsets of the main company For example a division can be a remote office or separate business unit Divisions are not required and will only be available if the Divisions option is selected in Main Company Configure screen Configure Divisions From the divisions dialog box you may add edit and delete Divisions 1 Click the System Setup menu Company Divisions The Configure Divisions dialog box will open 0001 Arizona 1 Listed C Number Name I Show Inactives Figure 29 Divisions 2 The Divisions window includes the following information Setting Definition Number This is a required field Enter a 4 digit number to identify the division NOTE Do not use 0000 since this number is assigned to the main company and cannot be used for divisions Name This is a required field Type the division name up to 30 characters as you want it to appear in the system and on reports Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the division is currently in use Uncheck this box if the division is not being used at this time Address Enter the first line address of the division Up to 30 characters may be entered in each line Address Enter the second line address of the division if applicable Up to 30 characters may be entered in each line City Type the name of t
187. he Accumulators dialog box Configure Benefit Accrual 100 General FT HOURLY EMPLOYE a Code Name EA Mactive Accumulators Categories to sum St nce Date s 1 Listed adi Es peee Regular Overtime 2 Overtime 1 Figure 85 Adding a Benefit Accumulator Accumulators Accumulator Reference Date Posting Basis OQHie OFiscal O Other Start Date 01 01 1992 C Wed Give 0 00 after 0 months from hire date Do not give hours if Employees status is inactive Accumulator Details 3 Straight Category hours Minimum Maximum Maximum Maximum Year Month Onetime hours calculation needed allowed carry over total Bo 9 9 90 40 000000 9 900000 0 99 990 ETETE A Add Edit Delete OK l Cancel Figure 86 Benefit Accumulators 2 The Accumulators dialog box contains the following information O January 2009 Time America Inc 107 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Accumulator Posting Basis Start Date Reference Date Give XX after X months from hire Do not give hours if Employee status is inactive O January 2009 Time America Inc Definition Select the category for this rule Only the categories that have been selected for benefit entitlement will display in this drop down box To select a category for benefit entitlement edit the Category in Configure Categories and check
188. he Allowed to 80 80 Allowed 40 Taken 40 Left Amount Enter the amount of the adjustment This number can be positive for an addition or negative for a deduction 5 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Benefit Details screen 6 Click Close to return to the Benefits screen Benefits Accrual Delete a Manual Adjustment 1 Navigate to the Benefits tab of the Configure Employee window See Benefit Accruals Configure page 140 Click the Details button The Benefit Details screen will display Highlight the Adjustment you wish to delete 4 Click the Delete button You will be prompted January 2009 Time America Inc 143 TA100 Pro Manual xi 2 4re you sure you want to delete Figure 114 Deletion Confirmation 5 Click OK to confirm the deletion 6 Click Close to return to the Benefits screen Employee Messages Tab The Messages tab allows you to create a customized message that will display when this employee punches at the clock Configure 1 Navigate to the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee page 119 2 Click the Messages tab to display the following information Configure Employee 00001 Washington Carol Active Template Division ALL pa Group ALL X Prior Find Next gt gt 0000 naton C Timecard Schedule Transactions Status Benefits MESSAGES ASSIGNED Clock ID Message wages Badges 10 beta 00003 Anderso
189. he city up to 30 characters for the division January 2009 Time America Inc TA100 Pro Manual State Zip Type the two character state abbreviation Enter the five or nine digit postal zip code of the division Phone Number Enter the telephone number for this division Fax Number Enter the fax number for this division Additional You may be prompted for additional Information information based upon the payroll Add a Division 1 Edit a Division 1 application selected in the Export screen of the Main Company configuration For example if ADP is selected in the Export screen you will be prompted for the company number of this division Click the System Setup menu Company Divisions The Configure Divisions dialog box will open Click the Add button The General screen will become available for you to add the new Division Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Divisions section Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Divisions screen Click Close to exit the Configure Divisions window Click the System Setup menu Company Divisions The Configure Divisions dialog box will open Highlight the Division you wish to edit from the list at the side of the screen Click the Edit button The General screen will become available for you to edit the selected division Edit the settings as described in the Configure Divisions section NOTE The Division number cannot
190. he clock keypad The employee s badge number can be entered by scanning a bar code Must also select the type of Bar Code badge Check the applicable check box es to indicate the method by which a supervisor in supervisor mode can enter employee badge number into the clock The employee s badge number can be entered by swiping a badge The employee s badge number can be entered by pressing keys on the clock keypad The employee s badge number can be entered by scanning a bar code Must also select the type of Bar Code badge 3 The Configure tab defines the message and timeout settings and contains the following information January 2009 Time America Inc 211 TA100 Pro Manual Configure TA780 785 Series Clocks 006 General Configure Assignments TA785 Time Outs Messages a For data input 60 0 ENTER FUNCTION message ENTER FUNCTION To ENTER FUNCTION 20 0 INVALID SOURCE message INVALID SOURCE Displayed messages 2 0 INVALID BADGE message INVALID BADGE Supervisor questions 90 0 INVALID LEVEL message INVALID LEVEL Error messages 1 5 Idle message Swipe amp Go Use Swipe and Go C Tum off function keys Skip recording of diagnostic and programming into Display idle time in military format Proximity Offset to remove Facility code 0 1 Listed Download Bell Schedule Figure 172 Configure TA715 TA777 TA780 Clocks Configure Tab Setting
191. he same field number For example regular REG hours for VACATION and HOLIDAY may both use field number 16 By assigning a field code V to the VACATION category and H to the HOLIDAY category vacation hours are reported in field 16V while holiday hours are reported in 16H If no field code was assigned you could not differentiate between vacation and holiday hours Add a Category 1 Click the System Setup menu Categories The Configure Categories dialog box will open 2 Click the Add button to add a new Category The General tab will become available Code equals category number from hand reader 0 Name M Active T Do you wish to export this category Hous C Dollars F Miscellaneous entry overrides absence T Miscellaneous entry overrides holiday minimum hours F Are miscellaneous entries paid Jo Can this category be ovenins T Post to benefit entitlement Apply Gk Cancel Figure 33 Adding a new Category 3 Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Categories section 4 Click OK to commit the changes and close the Categories dialog box 5 Click Close to exit the Configure Categories window Edit a Category 1 Click the System Setup menu Categories The Configure Categories dialog box will open Highlight the Category you wish to edit from the list at the side of the screen Click the Edit button The General screen will become available for you to edit the selected category
192. he total hours for that day Enter the number of minutes over Lunch Duration that is in graced For example if 05 is entered here and 60 in Lunch Duration any employee that punches In from Lunch within 65 minutes from punching Out is not considered late The default is 05 or 5 minutes Enter the minimum number of minutes an employee must take for lunch to be deducted Punching Out for Lunch and back In within this time is not counted toward lunch The default is 05 or 5 minutes 4 The TASC Employee tab lists the employees that can use this clock and contains the following information January 2009 Time America Inc 224 TA100 Pro Manual Configure TASC Series Clocks OListed Code Heme F Show Inactives NONE z General Policies 3 Diagnos Info Program Info Code Name Badge Policy Dept Export 0 Employees Listed Division Group TE Add All Add Edit Delete Epply Uf Cancel Figure 178 Configure TASC Clock Employee tab Setting Employee Listing Division Group Remove All Add All January 2009 Time America Inc Definition Displays a list of the employees that can use this clock Includes their Employee ID Employee Name Employee Badge the policy the employee is assigned to the department and if their information will be exported to your payroll provider Click this button to select employees based on Division Employees s
193. hs of a second For example 30 0 means that the clock will wait 30 seconds for a supervisor s response to a question such as Employee Badge The default is 90 0 seconds Enter the length of time from 0 1 to 99 9 seconds the clock will display any error message before returning to an idle state Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a second For example 1 0 means that the clock will display error messages for one second The default is 1 5 seconds These settings define the text prompts for certain operations at the clock This field allows you to replace the default ENTER FUNCTION message with a custom message up to 16 characters in length This message is displayed after swiping a badge or entering a badge number at the clock This field allows you to replace the standard INVALID SOURCE message with a custom message up to 16 characters in length This message will display when an input source is used that the terminal has been programmed to ignore For example the employee uses a magnetic strip badge to punch In when only keypad entry is recognized This field allows you to replace the standard INVALID BADGE message with a custom message up to 16 characters in length An INVALID BADGE message displays when a badge or card other than the specified badge length is used This field allows you to replace the default INVALID LEVEL message with a custom message This message is displayed when Validat
194. ica Inc 252 TA100 Pro Manual Repair Database The Repair Databases utility compares the contents of the database to the database s index and attempts to rebuild the index to compensate for any inconsistencies This utility cannot replace or recover data that has been lost or corrupted It is recommended that you repair your TA100 Pro databases prior to Reindexing in order to ensure that the data is optimized 1 Click the File menu Utilities Update Databases The Repair Selection dialog box will open Repair Selection JACRLACUM DBF ACRLADJ DBF Add ACRLCAT DBF IACRLDET DBF pal ACRLTOT DBF ARPTINFO DBF ARPTSEL DBF tere JARPTUSER DBF E JATTEND DBF NOYES AUTOCLK DBF JAUTOPOLL DBF zi f 109 Available D Selected Uk Cancel Figure 201 Repair Selection 2 Select the database you wish to repair by clicking Add to select an individual database or Add All to add all It is recommended that you repair all files 3 Click OK to begin the repairing process A progress bar will show the percentage of completion Reindex Database The Reindex Databases utility removes deleted records and sorts the data base in either numeric or alphabetic order depending on the contents Since this utility has the greatest impact on the speed and reliability of TA100 Pro it is recommended that you develop a weekly schedule for reindexing system database files Also it is a good idea to Repair the databa
195. ick OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Shift screen Click on the Differential tab to edit a shift differential Click the Edit button Edit the From To Day and Differential number Click OK to commit the changes and close the Shift Differential dialog box sO MNOS 0 Click Close to exit the Configure Shift dialog box Delete a Shift 1 Click the System Setup menu Shift The Configure Shift dialog box will open 2 Highlight the Shift you wish to from the list in the Center of the Groups screen 3 Click the Delete button next to the Shift Details window You will be prompted xi 7 Are you sure you want to delete Figure 50 Deletion Confirmation 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion 5 Click Close to exit the Configure Shift dialog box Add a Rounding Rule 1 Click the System Setup menu Shift The Configure Shift Group dialog box will open Click the Edit button to edit the Shift Group Click the Add In Out Rounding Lunch Rounding or Break Rounding button The Rounding Details dialog box will open 4 Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Shift Group section Click OK to commit the changes and close the Rounding dialog box Click Close to exit the Configure Rounding dialog box January 2009 Time America Inc 67 TA100 Pro Manual Edit a Rounding Rule 1 Click the System Setup menu Shifts The Configure Shift Group dialog box will open Click the Edit button
196. ific purpose e Main System Key e Polling Key e Demo Key Attach the hardware key to the computer s parallel port If you have a printer attached to the parallel port place the hardware key between the computer s parallel port and the printer cable as shown in Figure 17 Using a Hardware Key with a Printer Cable below Figure 17 Using a Hardware Key with a Printer Cable When the system is first launched TA100 Pro searches for and verifies the presence of a hardware key If a key is not found the system will not start Main System Key The Main System Key is shipped with each new software package One key per system is required The Main System Key allows you to start and operate the software as well as poll your time clock s The Main System Key is identified by the code 4HJDAB B on the outer shell Polling Key The Polling Key allows TA100 Pro to communicate with time clocks from a workstation other than where the Main System Key resides This key is identified by the code 4EQSGH B on the outer shell On local or wide area networks a remote workstation can launch and operate the software as long as the Main System Key is detected somewhere on the network However the workstation cannot poll time clocks unless it has an Additional Polling Key attached January 2009 Time America Inc 16 TA100 Pro Manual Demo Key The Demo Key is an accessory for resellers of TA100 Pro systems This key is identified by th
197. igure Security Levels ooon eiee a En a e aeaa e ea sds Pay sede cbinedutsbeteus 87 Adda Securty LOVEl ese a a R e a n a a a oy E QU Le ee eee 96 Edita Security Level conca a E E eve ut e E de E 96 Deleted Security Level is id E a E a e E E a e E a 97 User AA AAA NN 97 WHO S LOBg Cd MM a ii ds A ini 104 Change PassWord Lx a edita Gov A A 104 BENEFIT ACCRUA acot esco 105 Configure Benefit Accruals iiinis siiente iiss eaS e a r ia Es asai eae E EEEE Eana sees 105 Configure Benefit AccumulatorS oir iee eskenak seai e E raea dens aiaa aaeain ei 107 Adda Benefit Accruals POLICY is ctessiscssessssyesseasassetesntsussessagiaeudeies sass cebg case ivudedsncoesed seee o eais Eiaeia aei 110 Edit a Benefit Accruals Policy comino sides AE ear isen inaa ei 112 Delete Benefit Acerudls DOMINA a a E o iei EREA E R EANES 112 Update to Currente ii a i a ea eia BE i iA a RA E Eri A EE did 113 CHAPTER V OPTIONAL MODULES csccssssssssssrsesscssrsessessssessessesesessessessrsessessssessessssessessssessesessessesees 114 January 2009 Time America Inc iv TA100 Pro Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont BELLE SCHEDULES ci secseisesestie ce sausenseditespespucoce sodivere oaeen e aLi iia dirt 114 BENEFIT ACCRUALS vostre id it 114 PC CLOCK A OO NRO 114 PUN AI NO 115 CHAPTER VI ADDITIONAL EMPLOYEE FEATURES coocconconoonononnosiocinconconconcnncnnconoconcnnccnconcnnorcconono ros 116 POCO Roura a a as 116 Accessing PC Clock nia adas 116 Default Setting
198. ill be observed Add a Holiday 1 Click the System Setup menu Holiday The Configure Holiday dialog box will open 2 Click the Add button to add a new Holiday The General tab will become available Configure Holidays 02 25 2009 General Ash Wednesday a Date Wednesday Name Ash Wednesday v Active y Override Absent Allowed Apply Work Time on this Holiday to econdan OT Level Holiday Groups Include Code Name Y w 02 Group 02 03 Group 03 04 Group 04 5 Listed lisa Figure 52 Adding a new Holiday Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Holidays section Click OK to commit the changes and close the Holiday dialog box Click Close to exit the Configure Holiday dialog box Edit a Holiday 1 Click the System Setup menu Holidays The Configure Holidays dialog box will open Highlight the Holiday you wish to edit from the list at the side of the screen Click the Edit button The General screen will become available for you to edit the selected Holiday O January 2009 Time America Inc 70 TA100 Pro Manual 4 Edit the settings as described in the Configure Holiday section NOTE The date cannot be modified Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Holiday screen Click Close to exit the Configure Holiday dialog box January 2009 Time America Inc 71 TA100 Pro Manual Delete a Holiday 1 Click the S
199. in the Accumulator Detail settings as described in the Configure Benefit Accumulators section Click OK to accept the details and return to the Accumulator screen Repeat steps 6 through 8 for each unique accumulator details needed 10 Click OK to accept the Accumulator and return to the Benefit Accruals screen 11 Repeat steps 4 through 10 for each unique Accumulator Category needed 12 Click OK to commit the changes and close the Configure Benefit Accruals dialog box 13 Click Close to exit the Configure Benefit Accruals dialog box January 2009 Time America Inc 111 TA100 Pro Manual Edit a Benefit Accruals Policy 1 Click the Daily Operations menu Benefit Accruals Configure The Configure Benefit Accrual dialog box will open 2 Highlight the Benefit Accrual policy you wish to edit from the list at the side of the screen 3 Click the Edit button The General screen will become available for you to edit the selected Benefit Accrual policy 4 Edit the settings as described in the Configure Benefit Accruals section Once you are editing the Benefit Accrual you can further edit the Accumulator and Accumulator Details To edit the Accumulator click the Edit button in the Accumulator section in the center of the screen To edit the Accumulator Details first click the Edit button on the Benefit Accrual screen then click the Edit button in the Accumulator screen 6 Click OK as many times as necessary to commi
200. info Display idle time in military format Transaction Print Print transactions as they occur Line feed after 0 Header line 1 Header line 2 Download Bell Schedule Figure 170 Configure TA500 TA600 TA7000 Clocks Configure Tab Setting Definition Time Outs These settings determine how long prompts For data input To Enter function Displayed messages January 2009 Time America Inc and messages will appear on the clock s screen Enter the length of time from 0 1 to 99 9 seconds the clock will wait for a response to a prompt before returning to an idle state Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a second For example 10 0 means that the clock will wait 10 seconds for a response after prompting for input The default is 60 0 seconds Enter the length of time from 0 1 to 99 9 seconds the clock will wait for a response to enter a function before returning to an idle state Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a second For example 5 5 means that the clock will wait 5 2 seconds for a response after prompting for input The default is 20 0 seconds Enter the length of time from 0 1 to 99 9 seconds the clock will display any message before returning to an idle state Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a second For example 1 5 means that the clock will display messages for 112 seconds The default is 2 0 seconds 203 TA100 Pro Manual Super
201. into the clock Check the applicable check box es to indicate the method by which an employee badge number is entered into the clock The employee s badge number can be entered by swiping a badge The employee s badge number can be entered by pressing keys on the clock keypad The employee s badge number can be entered by scanning a bar code Check the applicable check box es to indicate the method by which a supervisor in supervisor mode can enter employee badge number into the clock The employee s badge number can be entered by swiping a badge The employee s badge number can be entered by pressing keys on the clock keypad The employee s badge number can be entered by scanning a bar code 202 TA100 Pro Manual 3 The Configure tab defines the message and timeout settings and contains the following information Configure TA600 Series Clocks 001 MAIN CLOCK 1 Listed A General Configure Time Outs Messages For data input ENTER FUNCTION message To ENTER FUNCTION 20 0 INVALID SOURCE message Displayed messages 20 INVALID BADGE message Supervisor questions 90 0 INVALID LEVEL message Error messages 15 Idle message ENTER FUNCTION INVALID SOURCE INVALID BADGE INVALID LEVEL TIME AMERICA INC Idle display sec 2 Date time display sec 2 Swipe amp Go Badges Highest Swipe amp Go number to be used 9999 Use Feedback Enhancer Skip recording of diagnostic and programming
202. ion Settin Definition Code This is a required field Enter a unique code up to 4 characters to identify the clock Once defined this code cannot be changed Description Enter a description of the clock This description will be seen in the system and on reports This field can be used to describe the clock type and it s location in your facility i e TASC In BUILDING TWO The clock description can be up to 30 characters long Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the clock is currently in use Uncheck this box if the clock is not being used at this time January 2009 Time America Inc 219 TA100 Pro Manual Path Port Serial Baud Lan Baud Rate LAN ID Converter Baud Rate O January 2009 Time America Inc Select the type of connection this clock will use The options are e Direct RS232 e LAN RS485 e Modem Internal e Serial LAN Smart Converter e Remote Direct External Modem e Modem LAN Smart Converter See Types of Connections page 197 Select the communications port on your computer that will be used to communicate with the clock The factory default is COM 1 This setting is for RS232 communication The factory default is 9600 These settings become available when LAN has been chosen as the communication type in the Communication Path field Select the applicable communication speed The default is 9600 baud Make sure the baud rate selected here matche
203. ion Security Utilities Other View Add Edit Del Reindex Repair Update C Purge R files Import Users Set Reprocess Date Archive and Restore Export Define Levels Fix Unassigned badges _ System Backup Print Setup Who is in Repost from A files System Restore Initialize can only be done by SYSOP 2 Listed Check all Figure 68 Configure Security Levels 2 The Configure Security Levels dialog box contains some general settings and several tabs all of which are described below Setting Definition Code This field is required Enter a unique code up to 10 characters to identify the security level Once saved this Code cannot be changed Name Enter a description of the security level in this field The description can be up to 30 characters long January 2009 Time America Inc 87 TA100 Pro Manual Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the level is currently in use Uncheck this box if the level is not being used at this time Set Date and Time Check this box to allow the user to update the date and time of the PC Print Lists Click the Print Lists check box to allow the user to print all available listings reports Check All This option will activate all available features in the File window Uncheck All This option will inactivate all available features in the File window 3 The File
204. ion is used and an invalid level number is entered It cannot be more than 16 characters January 2009 Time America Inc 213 TA100 Pro Manual Idle Message Use Swipe amp Go Turn off function keys Skip recording of diagnostic and programming info Display idle time in military format Proximity Offset to remove Facility code Download Bell Schedule Enter the message text that displays on the time clock when in an idle state If this field is left blank no message will be displayed It can accept a one line message that is up to 16 characters Select this feature to activate swipe and go in the clock NOTE The Swipe amp Go feature is enabled in the Main Company configuration screen See Main Company page 28 Select this feature if the clock will only be used as Swipe amp Go This feature disables all function key access at the clock Check this box to skip recording the Diagnostic and Programming information that display on the Diag Info and Prog Info tabs These two files are created and written to each time a clock is communicated with and programmed using TA100 Pro This information is used for troubleshooting communication problems These files slow the polling process down although not noticeably and can be turned off by checking the box NOTE Turning off these files will make it difficult to troubleshoot certain communication problems Click this check box to display the cloc
205. ion key to complete the transaction Clock In or Out Out to Lunch In from Lunch etc NOTE The Swipe amp Go feature is enabled in the Main Company configuration screen See Main Company page 28 Use feedback Select this check box to use the optional enhancer Feedback Enhancer if applicable If the Feedback Enhancer is not being used do not select this check box NOTE The TA500 series clocks need to be wired for bells and access for this feature to work Display idle time in Click this check box to display the clock s idle military format time in military format i e a 24 hour format Clear this box to display the clock s idle time in standard format i e a 12 hour clock In both cases the time is displayed using the HH MM SS format January 2009 Time America Inc 205 TA100 Pro Manual Skip recording of diagnostic and programming info Print Transactions as they occur Line Feed After Header line 1 Header line 2 Download Bell Schedule Check this box to skip recording the Diagnostic and Programming information that display on the Diag Info and Prog Info tabs These two files are created and written to each time a clock is communicated with and programmed using TA100 Pro This information is used for troubleshooting communication problems These files slow the polling process down although not noticeably and can be turned off by checking the box NOTE Turning off these files will m
206. ion report For example if 6 00 is entered in the Under or Over fields an employee working under or over 12 hours a day is flagged for the report An employee who works under or over this number of hours HH MM per day is reported on the Period Hours Exception report For example if 30 00 is entered in the Under or Over fields an employee working under or over 60 00 hours in a pay period is flagged for the report 53 TA100 Pro Manual Add a Policy 1 Click the System Setup menu Policies The Configure Policies dialog box will open 2 Click the Add button to add a new Policy The Default Policy Add dialog box will become available Configure Polices General Holidays Overtime Differential Exceptions Standard Policy Code OT _ r COPY DEFAULTS FROM Code Name e Yes No Cancel 7 rato 00 our 2 Listed Code Name T Show Inactives Edit Delete Pim Close Figure 41 Adding a new Policy 3 Enter a unique code for this policy 4 Enter a unique name for this policy 5 Click Yes to copy the existing policy or click No to start from scratch 6 Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Policies section 7 Click OK to commit the changes and close the General dialog box 8 Click Close to exit the Configure Policies dialog box Edit a Policy 1 Click the System Setup menu Policies The Configure Policies dialog box will open Highlight the Policy you wish to ed
207. ips are listed below Setting Definition Apply You may click the Apply button in any screen to commit the changes you have made without exiting the current screen This allows you to save as you go and is a good practice Name vs Number You will notice that most of the configuration listing dialog boxes provide a list of the existing items at the side of the screen For example the Divisions dialog box gives you a list of Divisions These lists can be sorted according to Name or Number depending upon your preference Show Inactives Check this button to show inactive items in the list at the side of any dialog box Print You may click the Print button in any dialog to print the report associated with the current screen For example clicking the Print button in the Configure Category dialog box prints the Category Listing report Cancel You may click the Cancel button in any dialog box to close the screen without saving changes NOTE The Employee Maintenance and Status Board sections will resize themselves according to the monitor resolution Using the Keyboard TA100 Pro system is designed so you can perform all operations from your keyboard as well as with the mouse TA100 Pro Time merica Inc File Daily Operations Reports System Setup Communications M65 a x G Hep F1 b E Hot Key an 9 a y 0 Y 4 Calculator F2 G About F9 B System Configuration Fil Conversion table F12 Underlined
208. ired field Enter the group name as you want it to appear in the system and on reports The group name can be up to 30 characters long Active Click the Active check box to indicate that the employee group is currently in use Clear this check box if the group is not being used at this time Add a Group 1 Click the System Setup menu Groups The Configure Groups dialog box will open 2 Click the Add button to add a new Group The General tab will become available Configure Groups 001 Time America Inc Prov General W Active 2 Listed G Code CName I Show Inactive Bool Gk Cancel Figure 55 Adding a new Group Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Groups section Click OK to commit the changes and close the Group dialog box Click Close to exit the Configure Groups dialog box Edit a Group 1 Click the System Setup menu Groups The Configure Groups dialog box will open Highlight the Group you wish to edit from the list at the side of the screen Click the Edit button The General screen will become available for you to edit the selected Group January 2009 Time America Inc 73 TA100 Pro Manual 4 Edit the settings as described in the Configure Groups section NOTE The Group Code cannot be changed Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Groups screen Click Close to exit the Configure Groups dialog box Delete a Group 1 Click the Sy
209. is 2 0 seconds Enter the length of time from 0 1 to 99 9 seconds the clock will wait for a response to a supervisor question before returning to an idle state Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a second For example 30 0 means that the clock will wait 30 seconds for a supervisor s response to a question such as Employee Badge The default is 90 0 seconds Enter the length of time from 0 1 to 99 9 seconds the clock will display any error message before returning to an idle state Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a second For example 1 0 means that the clock will display error messages for one second The default is 1 5 seconds These settings define the text prompts for certain operations at the clock This field allows you to replace the default ENTER FUNCTION message with a custom message up to 16 characters in length This message is displayed after swiping a badge or entering a badge number at the clock The TASC terminal is similar to the TA500 and TA600 Series in that it collects punches and transmits them to the software via the polling process However TASC is a stand alone time clock This means that it does not require a PC to calculate and record employee s time TASC is perfect for situations in which a remote site performs its own transaction editing while payroll and other functions are processed at a central location The remote site can print January 2009 Time America Inc
210. is calculated TIP Begin by entering your first level of overtime in OT1 If after 40 hours of work per week you pay time and a half enter 40 00 in the Period Limit field and 1 5000 in the Multiplier field If double time is paid after 60 hours enter 60 00 in the Period Limit field and 2 0000 in the Multiplier field for OT2 On Sundays and holidays you may want to pay double time and one half regardless of hours worked In this case enter 99 99 in the Period Limit field and 2 5000 in the Multiplier field for OT3 Up to three levels of overtime OT1 OT2 and OT3 may be defined per policy Enter the number of hours in HH MM format that an employee must work to be eligible for overtime For example in a weekly pay period the Period Limit is typically defined as 40 00 in a biweekly period it is normally defined as 80 00 Enter the multiplication factor used to compute overtime pay The normal pay rate is multiplied by this number For example to pay time and a half enter 1 50 to pay double time enter 2 00 These settings allow paying daily overtime For example many companies pay daily overtime over eight hours per day Another example is paying double overtime on Sundays regardless of how many hours are worked in the overtime cycle Select the day s of the week that are paid daily overtime by checking the appropriate checkbox Select the applicable overtime level to be paid if any at the start of the day
211. is category If the category can be overtime it is also possible to default to a specific level as well as enable it to accumulate towards overtime Select this option to post accrued time in this category to company benefits Checking this option makes it possible to configure benefit entitlement and or rules for this pay type Also any time posted to this category will be deducted from the available entitlement for this category 3 The Export Codes tab will be available only ifthe Do you wish you to export this category option is checked NOTE These settings will be used to map data collected by TA100 Pro to the appropriate fields in your payroll application and it is critical that they be configured fully and accurately The information in these fields must be obtained from the payroll service specified in Company Setup Contact your payroll service representative or software manual for the information requested if necessary O January 2009 Time America Inc 39 TA100 Pro Manual Configure Categories PTO Paid Time Off ERV BE JEMEN 2 1 1 I General Export Codes Differential REG OTI O12 O73 None 000101 fooo000 foocooo andas Field Code SS D1 fooo000 foooo00 000000 000000 D2 000000 000000 foooooo fonnnnn D3 fooo000 foooooo foooooo ononon TORK WORKED TIN 20 Listed Co Narre isa act Arey ok Cancel Figure 32 Export Codes tab The Export
212. is unable to be reached and will time out This value is minutes and tenths of minutes Connect wait minutes is used solely for Ethernet communication ATS series clocks do not respond immediately to a communication query across Ethernet communication instead they broadcast continuously on a 30 second cycle Depending on the speed of the network used the amount of time needed for the attention signal sent from TA100 Pro to reach the clock the clock to finish its 30 second cycle and send a signal back can fluctuate greatly 227 January 2009 Time America Inc TA100 Pro Manual Hayes compatible modem Modem number IP Address IP Port Time difference between clock and computer Division Idle Message Keyboard entry Supervisor functions O January 2009 Time America Inc Check whether the modem used to call the clock is Hayes Compatible Hayes Corporation is one of the founders of modem technology and as a result some modems list themselves as Hayes Compatible If not sure try both configurations Refers to modem connected to this computer Needed only if modem communication will be used Enter the phone number the PC modem must dial to communicate with this clock The number must be entered in the following format Outside Line Access Code Wait Symbol Area Code Phone Number If no outside line is required such as 9 simply enter the phone number Omit the area code if not applicable On
213. it from the list at the side of the screen Click the Edit button The General screen will become available for you to edit the selected Policy 4 Edit the settings as described in the Configure Policies section Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Configure Policies screen Click Close to exit the Configure Policies dialog box Delete a Policy 1 Click the System Setup menu Policy The Configure Policies dialog box will open Highlight the Policy you wish to delete from the list at the side of the screen Click the Delete button You will be prompted January 2009 Time America Inc 54 TA100 Pro Manual xi 2 Are you sure you want to delete Figure 42 Deletion Confirmation 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion 5 Click Close to exit the Configure Policies dialog box O January 2009 Time America Inc 55 TA100 Pro Manual Shifts Shifts define the work schedule for your employees Shifts are created in Shift Groups which can include multiple Shifts For example you may have a Shift Group for the Day Shift workers in which unique Shifts may start at 7am 8am and 9am Rounding rules are applied to the Shift Group to determine employee tardiness and rounding An employee assigned to a Shift Group can be assigned to any of the individual shifts within it The employee may also float between Shifts which causes TA100 Pro to determine tardiness and rounding according to the Shift the employee p
214. it the change Click the Append To button to select the table onto which this data will be appended The Open dialog box will open January 2009 Time America Inc 248 TA100 Pro Manual AA 2x Look in DBFS Y e 0 e Ee i H a arptinfo dbf aa autorep dbf a clckread dl sa arptsel dbf sa autosets dbf a clock dbf sa arptuser dbf laa belldet dbf laa clockkey d sa attend dbf sa bells dbF Ba cloctasc ct la autocik dbf Ea category dbf Ea company c sa autopoll dbf sa catexprt dbF sa dept dbF 2 APPEND Files of type Table DBF X Cancel Help Figure 196 Open 7 Select the TA100 Pro database file to which you wish to append and click the USE button to continue 8 Click OK to begin the import process Exporting Data The Export function allows you to extract data from TA100 Pro for use in other programs When exported the database files can be used with many commercial spreadsheet programs and report writers to generate custom reports The supported applications are Microsoft Multiplan 4 01 MOD Lotus 123 versions 1 through 2 WKS WK1 Symphony version 1 through 1 2 WRK WR1 Microsoft Excel XLS Comma Delimited Tab Delimited Space Delimited System Data Format SDF Symbolic Link Format SYLK Data Interchange Format DIF Database FoxPlus 1 Click the File menu Export The Configure Export dialog box will open O January 2009 Time America Inc 249
215. its as follows Category Hours X Factor Accrued Benefit Enter the minimum hours required to be worked in the Posting Basis period for the employee to be eligible for any benefits accrual For example this could be used to pay benefits only if the employee works more than 30 hours per week 109 TA100 Pro Manual Maximum Hours Enter the maximum hours that can be Allowed accumulated for this category during the Posting Basis period This is used to keep employees who work lots of hours from accruing more benefits than they are entitled to Maximum Annual Enter the number of hours the employee can Carry Over carry forward into the next benefit year on the Reference Date For no carry over use it or lose it enter 0 Maximum Total Enter the maximum number of hours the Benefit Hours employee is allowed to accrue during the benefit year For example this could be used to cap accruals at a maximum amount Add a Benefit Accruals Policy 1 Click the Daily Operations menu Benefit Accruals Configure The Configure Benefit Accrual dialog box will open 2 Click the Add button to add a new Benefit Accruals policy The General tab will become available Configure Benefit Accrual 100 General FT HOURLY EMPLOYE Code Name v Active A Accumulators Categories to sum PostingBasis Statdate Reference Date Code Name A Y 1 Listed Regular Overtime 2 Overtime 1 Add
216. k s idle time in military format i e a 24 hour format Clear this box to display the clock s idle time in standard format i e a 12 hour clock In both cases the time is displayed using the HH MM SS format Enter the number of characters defining the Facility code the proximity badge should not read Check this box to download a pre defined Bell Schedule to this clock This option is only available with the Bell Schedule module 4 NOTE This tab will only apply to TA780 Clocks using the fingerprint option The Assignments tab lists the employees that can use this clock This is only necessary if you are using fingerprints with TA780 clocks January 2009 Time America Inc 214 TA100 Pro Manual Configure TA780 Series Clocks ESTA o A Code Name Badge Special Enroll Template v Fingerprint Mode Verity Identify Group Removes Adda Add y 0 Employees Listed OListed Figure 173 Configure TA780 Clocks Assignments tab The tab contains the following information Setting Definition Employee Listing Displays a list of the employees that can use this clock Includes employee code employee name employee badge number special enrollment and if they have a fingerprint template saved Fingerprint Mode Verify This option will only verify employee number with fingerprint Identify This option will identify employee from the fingerprint only Division Click this button to s
217. l Tip reporting Wages Overtime Level 2 Overtime Level 3 Use Swipe and Go Use am pm Format Do not use Floater for shift selection Editable Pay Periods plus days O January 2009 Time America Inc Definition Level Wage refers to the hourly rate associated with a department job step operation or task The default assignment wage refers to the wage associated with an individual employee Check this box if you wish the Level Wage for the department an employee works in to take precedence over the Default Assignment Wage when calculating an employee s earnings Check this box if paid lunches and breaks are not considered in calculating hours for overtime This option allows you to define the e mail configuration per user in security Check this box to enable tip reporting Check this box to enable the wages features throughout TA100 Pro This makes it possible to enter wage information in the Employee Maintenance screen Up to three levels of overtime may be defined in TA100 Pro One overtime level OT1 is always available To use a second overtime level OT2 click the Overtime Level 2 check box To use a third overtime level OT3 in the system click the Overtime Level 3 check box This level is not available unless Overtime Level 2 is selected Check this option to allow employees to swipe the clock without punching any keys The system then determines whether the individual punch was
218. l Clock Selection E Add Add all Remove g ee H E Close Figure 188 Poll Clock Selection 2 s TASC Clock 2 Select the clock s you wish to poll by using the Add button to add the selected clock individually or the Add All button to add all clocks 3 Click the Polling Options tab to select it Fill in the settings as appropriate Setting Definition Poll Transactions Check this option to transfer punches from the clock to TA100 Pro O January 2009 Time America Inc 238 TA100 Pro Manual Clear Clock Transactions Set Clock Date and Time Program Clock Load Bell Schedules Load Messages Hand Reader O January 2009 Time America Inc Check this option to clear the transactions from the clock after transferring them to TA100 Pro TIP This does not need to be done every time You may leave the transactions in the clock until payroll is processed successfully however if you have a lot of employees you will want to clear frequently so the clock does not get full Check this option to send the computer s current date and time to the clock TIP You may not want to do this every time as the clock s internal clock tends to be much more accurate that the computer s Check this option to send programming and configuration information such as the settings in the Configure Clock dialog box to the clock Clock function keys and function messages are sent to the clock during programming
219. l Time or Part Time as of the effective date Permanent Select whether the employee is a Permanent or Temporary employee as of the effective date Add Employee Status When an employee changes Status it is recommended that you add a new Status entry rather than editing the existing Status This enables you to keep a history of Status changes throughout the employee s work history 1 Navigate to the Status tab of the Configure Employee window 2 Click the Add button to add a new Status The Status Maintenance dialog box will open Date MAMAA Friday r STATUS Active Full Time Permanent C Inactive C Part Time C Temporary Policies 00l STANDARD PAY RULES x DK Cancel Figure 105 Adding a new Status 3 Fill in the settings as appropriate Setting Definition Date Enter the date that this Status change becomes effective Active Inactive Choose whether the employee is Active or Inactive as of the selected date Active indicates that the employee is currently working for the company Inactive indicates that the employee is not currently working for the company perhaps because of a leave of absence or termination Full Time Part Time Choose whether the employee is Full Time or Part Time as of the selected date Permanent Temporary Choose whether the employee is Permanent or Temporary as of the selected date Policies Select the Policy that will apply to this employee as of
220. l install lt Back Cancel Figure 5 Setup Type 7 Choose the type of installation you wish to perform a Full will install both the software and the database files on this computer Typical b Workstation will install just the software 8 Click the Next button to continue with the installation The Select Program Folder screen will appear Genesis Pro Setup x Select Program Folder Please select a program folder F bs Setup will add program icons to the Program Folder listed below You may type a new folder name or select one from the existing folders list Click Next to continue Program Folders Pro Existing Folders Accessories a Administrative Tools Adobe Acrobat 4 0 Dell Documents Genesis HourTrack 98 Microsoft Office Tools Microsoft Reference xl lt Back Cancel Figure 6 Select Program Folder 9 The TA100 Pro folder will be created automatically You may type a new folder name if you wish Click Next to continue The installation will begin Copying Files CAGENPRO GenPro exe Figure 7 TA100 Pro Installation Progress 10 When the installation is finished the InstallShield Wizard Complete screen will appear Click the Finish button to proceed 11 If you selected Full in the Setup Type screen the Sentinel System Driver installation will begin automatically If you selected Workstation the installation will end at this point
221. late this number by multiplying the number of employees working in the department by the dollar amount each employee is expected to accumulate in the pay period This number is then divided by the total number of days in the pay period Example 10 employees X 600 dollars per pay period 6000 total dollars 6000 total dollars 7 days in the pay period 857 14 budgeted total dollars Hourly Wage Enter the hourly wage paid to employees working in this department The Use Hourly Wage check box must be selected for this field to be available O January 2009 Time America Inc 77 TA100 Pro Manual Add a Department 1 Click the System Setup menu Department The Configure Department dialog box will open 2 Click the Add button to add a new Department The General tab will become available Configure Department 1 Code 7 Name M Active I Validate T Use Hourly Wage FP Use Piece Rate Budgeted Total Hours 0 00 Budgeted Total Dollars 0 0000 Hourly wage 3 Listed Piece work rate Code Elame Te Grow Inactive Boely Gk Cancel Figure 58 Adding a new Department Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Departments section Click OK to commit the changes and close the Department dialog box 5 Click Close to exit the Configure Department dialog box Edit a Department 1 Click the System Setup menu Department The Configure Department dialog box will open 2
222. loaded from the clocks There is one R File for each day which contains all the punches from that day This data is imported into TA100 Pro but the original file is kept so that it can be referenced or re imported if necessary Reposting an R File allows you to re import the punch data stored in one of these files 1 Click the File menu Utilities Repost from R Files The Repost R Files dialog box will open Repost R files r Reiles ll IagAll Untag All k Close Figure 209 Repost R Files 2 Select the file you wish to repost by double clicking it to tag it Or select all files by clicking the Tag All button 3 Click OK to repost the files Purge R Files R Files are the files that store punch data downloaded from the clocks There is one R File for each day which contains all the punches from that day This data is imported into TA100 Pro but the original file is kept so that it can be referenced or re imported if necessary These files are kept indefinitely taking up space on your hard drive You may wish to purge delete these files periodically in order to free up disk space This should not be done before a particular R File has been successfully imported to TA100 Pro as doing so will result in a loss of the punches contained in the R File 1 Click the File menu Utilities Purge R Files The Purge R Files dialog box will open January 2009 Time America Inc 258 TA100 Pro Manual Purse ries
223. lows your time clock to activate a bell at specified times of day For example you might have a bell ring to announce the start of a shift break or lunch and the end of the day The bell schedule is defined by the day of the week the time of day and the duration of the bell The bell schedules module can ring up to 336 bells per Time clock per week Each bell schedule template can contain multiple bell details Once the Bell Schedule has been created you will add the individual dates and times the bells will ring The Bell Schedule is then downloaded to the appropriate time clocks For more information see Bell Schedules page 83 Benefit Accruals Using Benefit Accruals TA100 Pro can automatically calculate the available benefit time for your employees These calculations are based upon rules that can account for different benefit types vacation sick personal etc different accrual methods seniority rules and other factors Benefit time taken is automatically subtracted from the available benefits so that balances are always accurate TA100 Pro allows for an unlimited number of policies so that you can accommodate different situations within your company Each policy contains Accumulators which specify the Categories amounts and rules for earning benefits After the policies are created they are assigned to appropriate employees within the company For more information see Benefit Accruals page 105 NOTE Benefit Accruals is a
224. loyees are able to start punching at the clocks before their data is entered into TA100 Pro The badge used by the employee is considered to be unassigned if the employee s punches are polled prior to the employee being added to the software You can repost the employee s punches after adding the employee to the software using this utility 1 Click the File menu Utilities Fix Unassigned Badges The Unassigned Badge Maintenance dialog box will open Unassigned Badge Maintenance OLitted Repost badge to Employee Number Figure 208 Unassigned Badge Maintenance 2 This screen will show the employees whose badges were unassigned at the time of polling 3 Select the employee you wish to repost Make sure that this employee is added to the program at this time and has the correct badge number You may also click Print to view a list of all unassigned badges 4 Click the Repost button TA100 Pro will match the badge in the transaction to a badge assigned to the employee 5 The Special Repost option will compare the listed badges to current employee numbers rather than comparing to a badge number It assigns any transaction to the employee whose employee number matches the unassigned badge number This option should only be chosen after a regular reposting 6 Click Close to exit the dialog box January 2009 Time America Inc 257 TA100 Pro Manual Repost from R Files R Files are the files that store punch data down
225. ls 4 Select the clock s to which the message should be sent by click Add to select a single clock or Add All to select all clocks 5 Check Default message to Employee name or enter the Message you wish to send The Message can be up to 20 characters long this is the maximum number of characters that can display on the LCD panel of the clock 6 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Global Message Assignment dialog box 7 Click OK to send the message The message will display to employees after it is uploaded to the clock 8 Click Close to exit the dialog box Global Add Transaction Global Add Transaction allows you to add a transaction of any type for multiple employees This can be used to clock all employees out at a certain time enter vacation or sick time for multiple employees etc 1 Click the Daily Operations menu Global Transactions The Global Add Transaction dialog box will open O January 2009 Time America Inc 180 TA100 Pro Manual Global Add Transaction A Add Add all v v 5 Available 0 Selected Figure 152 Global Add Transaction 2 Select the employee s you wish to assign using the techniques described above see Selecting Employees in Global Operation Dialog Boxes page 178 3 Click the Punch button The Global Add Transaction Details dialog box will open Date and Time ies Ae Function 07 24 2007 11 56 12 Tue Celt te Clock 001 Demo
226. most modems the wait symbol is a comma typically representing a one second pause Multiple wait symbols can be used if necessary Enter the IP address assigned to the clock Displays the port used for Ethernet The default is 2500 and should not be changed Altering this number will result in communication failure and the possibility of only being able to connect to the Etherlink Converter serially Enter the time difference in hours between the computer and time clock Since the computer can set the clock s time this field compensates for time zone differences between the computer s location and the clock s location When the clock s time is set the system either adds or subtracts this time difference from the computer s clock A setting of 0 indicates that the clock and computer are in the same time zone Select the company division where the clock is located Every transaction entered on this clock is tagged with this division code Enter the message text that displays on the time clock when in an idle state If this field is left blank no message will be displayed Check this box to allow employees to enter badge numbers and other data such as department numbers on the clock s keypad Check this box to allow supervisor functions such as entering punches at the clock 228 TA100 Pro Manual Swipe amp Go For data input Displayed messages Download messages Hand Reader Clocks The Han
227. mp camo bmp cellulr bmp chesssm bmp coolbrz bmp cow8bit bmp cranbry bmp s Gradient Background on Forms Yes ox J Cancel Detar Figure 24 Select Background Choose the graphics file you wish to use for your background e Click the directory or file to select it e Click the icon to go to a previous directory Click OK to accept the selected file Your graphic will appear on the background of TA100 Pro NOTE To reset the background settings to the defaults Click the File menu Environment Background The Select Background window will open Click the Defaults button Gradient Background Option You can activate the gradient background for all forms in TA100 Pro Navigation Selection You can customize the main toolbar to display a small button toolbar large button toolbar show center screen shortcut side bar or zoom bar 1 Click the File menu Environment Navigation Selection Then select from the list of options Navigation Selection Small Button Toolbar Large Button Toolbar O Center Screen Shortcut O Side Bar O Zoom Bar H Cancel January 2009 Time America Inc 26 TA100 Pro Manual Chapter IV Configuration This section explains how to configure and customize TA100 Pro for your company s requirements To make this chapter easier to follow the topics in this section are arranged in the sequence that Time America recommends completing them This also
228. mployees editing employee information and managing employee schedules and assignments It also contains links to the Timecard editing sections of this manual Configure Employee The Configure Employee window contains all information relating to your employees including contact schedule and time sheet data All of the tabs in the window are described in this chapter however some of the tabs such as the Timecard and Transactions have additional tasks associated with them and have been given their own sections in this manual There are two ways to access the Configure Employee window by menu or by tool button Both methods are described below 1 Click the Daily Operations menu Employee or click the Maintenance button on the toolbar The Configure Employee window will open Configure Employee 00003 Timecard Schedule Transactions Status Benefits Messages Wages Badges Clocks Detail Anderson Frank Date Day Cat Start Stop Department Reg OTI 0T2 OT3 Unpaid Dollar Active IBER 1 A Mon 0003 la i Anderson Frank Baines Peter 00002 Jones David 00004 Smith John 00005 Washington Carol 00001 Auto processing Show Schedule Forecasting C Approve _ Pay Petiods back TT Key From 07 22 2007 to 07 28 2007 07 22 2007 07 23 2007 07 24 2007 07 25 2007 07 26 2007 07 27 2007 07 28 2007 __ Totals 0 00 0 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00
229. n Transactions can be added from the Online Timecard or from the Transactions tab of the Configure Employee dialog box The method is the same in both locations This option for adding a transaction works best when you are going to manually enter all elements of the transaction NOTE A popup window is available to add edit Start and Stop entries The popup window can be accessed by double clicking or a right click in the Start and Stop fields Date and Time Date and Time 01 06 2005 07 00 00AM Thu 01407 2005 07 00 00 AM Fri ADDING 3 OK Cancel EDITING OK Cancel Navigate to the Online Timecard for the employee you wish to edit See Online Timecard page 160 Or navigate to the Transactions tab of the Configure Employee dialog box and select the employee for whom you wish to add a transaction See Employee Transactions page 133 Click the Add Trans Online Timecard or Add Transactions button The Transaction Detail dialog box will open Transaction Detail for 00001 Washington Carol Date and Time E Gee 09 19 2005 07 06 11 MON CJ 3 57 T mo TASZO v Override Round Override Automatic Lunches and Breaks ADDING TRANSACTION Cox tra Figure 135 Transaction Detail The Transaction Detail dialog box contains the following information Setting Date Definition Enter the date for this transaction O January 2009 Time America Inc 163 TA100 Pro Ma
230. n Frank 00004 Jones David 00005 Smith John Ei All Clocks Add Edit Delete Figure 115 Configure Employee Messages tab 5 Listed Number C Name Iv Show Inactives Setting Definition Clock Id Displays the number of the clock at which this message will display Message Displays the message The message can be up to 20 characters and the default is the employee s first initial and last name All Clocks This opens the All Clocks dialog box Here you can Button create a message and assign it to all available clocks O January 2009 Time America Ine MA TA100 Pro Manual Add a Message You can send a message to each clock individually or to all clocks that the employee uses To a Single Clock 1 Navigate to the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee page 119 2 Click the Add button to add a new message to send to an individual clock The Message Assignment dialog box will open Message Assignment A E r CLOCKS Clock Code oo1 Demo TASZO Message PBames OK Cancel Figure 116 Adding a new Message 3 Select the clock to which this message should be sent 4 Enter the message you wish to send Up to 20 characters may be entered Or check the Default message to Employee name to send the employee s First Initial and Last Name 5 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Messages screen To All Clocks 1 Navigate to the Configure
231. n Detail dialog box will open 3 Fill in the settings as described in the Add Transaction section 4 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Online Timecard Edit Add Stop Edit Add Stop is available from the Online Timecard The Edit Add Stop button opens the Transaction Detail dialog box and automatically fills in certain fields e The Date fills in with the date selected in the Timecard e The Time fills in with the employee s scheduled Clock Out time for the selected date e The Function fills in with Clocked Out e The Override Punch Link Back Time is now an override feature this option will ignore all punch link back time associated with a policy This edit must be initiated from the stop time This option is easiest when you are adding a Clock Out for the day that matches or is close to the employee s scheduled Out time Transaction Detail for 00003 Anderson Frank Date and Time fa Function OUT v MSAA 15 00 0 Mon i Ez 050 07 Clock 001 Demo TA520L v Override Round Override Punch Link Back Time ADDING TRANSACTION 1 Navigate to the Online Timecard for the employee you wish to edit See Online Timecard page 160 2 Click the Edit Add Stop button The Transaction Detail dialog box will open 3 Fill in the settings as described in the Add Transaction section 4 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Online Timecard Multiple Miscellaneous The Multiple Miscellaneous button app
232. n additional module added into TA100 Pro If you did not purchase Benefit Accruals you will have Benefit Entitlement instead See Benefit Entitlement Configure page 137 PC Clock PC Clock is an optional module that may be installed on anyone s workstation and allows employees to clock in and out for the day to and from lunch and to and from breaks from their workstation Employees may also use PC Clock to transfer departments and change their own passwords PC Clock makes it easy to gather time from thousands of users in every corner of your enterprise either across the building or across the country PC Time Clock is perfect in situations where hardware data collection systems can t be cost justified or where hardware time clocks don t match into your organization s environment For more information see PC Clock page 207 O January 2009 Time America Ine s s lt issSSS A TA100 Pro Manual Third Party Terminals Third Party Terminals is an optional module that allows the use of Biometric Hand Readers ATS series clocks and biometric fingerprint readers For more information see Hand Readers page 229 and see ATS page 226 O January 2009 Time America Inc 115 TA100 Pro Manual Chapter VI Additional Employee Features This section reviews how to use the additional Employee Feature of the PC Clock which is available with the TA100 Pro PC Clock PC Clock is an application that allows employees to punch In and Ou
233. n archive is transactions and schedules This information can be added back into TA100 Pro by Restoring the Archive If the information is going to be edited the Post Historical Data utility needs to be run after Restoring from Archive to unpost the data and make it available for edits TA100 Pro archive files ending with ARC It is important to note that when restoring an archive the archive does not get deleted or altered in any way It still exists in the same state as before the restoring process The transactions in the archive are copied into the appropriate TA100 Pro database lt is possible to restore individual employees from the archive 1 Click the File menu Utilities Restore Archive The Restore Archive Maintenance dialog box will open Restore Archive Maintenance r DUPLICATE RECORDS Archive overwrites existing records Keep existing records Employees to restore All Employees C Individual Employees DATE RANGE From 01 01 1990 Mon To 09 01 2001 Sat K Cancel Figure 213 Restore Archive Maintenance 2 Fill in the settings as appropriate Settin Definition Select File Click the Select File button to choose the Archive file you wish to restore Archive overwrites Check this option to have TA100 Pro existing records overwrite duplicate records with the archived data Keep existing Check this option to have TA100 Pro keep records existing records and ignore the duplicate archived data
234. n failure Enter the time difference in hours between the computer and time clock Since the computer can set the clock s time this field compensates for time zone differences between the computer s location and the clock s location When the clock s time is set the system either adds or subtracts this time difference from the computer s clock A setting of 0 indicates that the clock and computer are in the same time zone Select the company division where the clock is located Every transaction entered on this clock is tagged with this division code 3 The Time Zones tab sets time periods during which the clock can be used When a person is entered into the Hand Reader they must be assigned a Time Zone Up to 60 Time Zones can be configured per clock HP2000 Hand Punch clocks do not support Time Zones 4 windows for punching may be setup for each Time Zone By default the Hand Punch allows punches at any time The Time Zones table contains the following information January 2009 Time America Inc 231 TA100 Pro Manual Configure Hand Reader Clocks O Listed Code Heme Te Show Inactive General Th Acton hey Proglnfo Time Zones Description r Access Windows Start Stop Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat a 0000 E E E 1 2 3 fan 4 aw ox comas Figure 181 Configure Hand Reader Clocks Time Zones tab Setting Time Zones D
235. n or Task In this section Level refers to the Department Job Step Operation or Task as appropriate The procedure is the same regardless of which level you are defining thus they are all described together 1 Navigate to the Wages tab of the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee Wages page 146 Select the Non Exempt option Click the Department or Job button depending upon choice The Level Wage Details dialog box will open Department Wage Details for 00002 Baines Peter E As defined under configure IN wage 2 Sales I Use hourly wage 11 0000 0 0000 3 Programming Service IV Use piece tate 1 0000 0 0000 Default for Aug 19 01 El 2 Sales Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Aug19 01 Aug20 01 Aug 2101 Aug22 D1 Aug23 01 Aug24 01 Aug25 01 11 0000 11 0000 11 0000 11 0000 11 0000 11 0000 11 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Aug 26 01 Aug 27 01 Aug 28 01 Aug 29 01 Aug 30 01 Aug 31 01 Sep 1 01 11 0000 11 0000 11 0000 11 0000 11 0000 11 0000 11 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Sep 2 01 Sep 3 01 Sep 4 01 Sep 5 01 Sep 6 01 Sep 7 01 Sep 8 01 11 0000 11 0000 11 0000 11 0000 11 0000 11 0000 11 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 Close Hourly Wage Piece Rate Figure 122 Adding a new Level Wage 4 The Level Wage Details dialog box contains the following informati
236. n to TA100 Pro which employees they can manage and which areas of the program they can use The user is given a login Id and password is assigned a Security Level and granted permission to select groups of employees NOTE Define Levels must be completed before adding any users Configure Users 1 Click the File menu Security User Maintenance The Configure Users window will open O January 2009 Time America Inc 97 TA100 Pro Manual Configure Users SYSOP Users Divisions Groups OPERATOR SYSTEM zl User Login TAIKENS Password eee Supervisor Badge 110421 Y Active Name Last AIKENS First TRACY Security Level OR LEVEL v Startup Start in Mainmenu Color quality High E mail a SMTP server TRACYA TIMEAMERICA COM utgoing Security if needed A User Name 1 Listed Display Name E mail Address Kawad Figure 76 Configure Users The Configure Users dialog box contains several tabs each of which is described below The Users tab contains the following information Configure Users SYSOP OPERATOR SYSTEM 4 User Login TAIKENS Users Divisions Groups Password Supervisor Badge 110421 Y Active Name Last AIKENS First TRACY Security Level ERVISOR SUPERVISOR LEVEL v Startup Start in Mainmenu Color quality High Y E mail a SMTP server TRACYA TIMEAMERICA COM 7 Display Name E mail Address Outgoing Securit
237. nc 164 TA100 Pro Manual Transaction Detail for 00001 Washington Carol Date and Time E 09 19 2005 E ds Miscellaneous J La 7 06 6 Clock 001 J Function xis MON v A2520L v Override Round VACATION add O subtract HH MM 08 M ADDING TRANSACTION Figure 136 Transaction Detail C Accrue towards overtime Differential 010102 O3 Level 4 The Transaction Detail dialog box contains the following information Setting Date Time Function Clock Override Round Override Automatic Lunches and Breaks Miscellaneous Information Category Add Subtract HH MM Amount January 2009 Time America Inc Definition Enter the date for this transaction Enter the time for the transaction HH MM SS Enter this in military time Select Miscellaneous for this transaction The Miscellaneous function is used for entering absences vacation tips and other categories of time and dollars Select the clock to which the transaction should be attributed Check this option to have TA100 Pro ignore the rounding rules for this transaction Check this option to cancel all automatic lunches and breaks assigned to a specific day The edit must be initiated from the start time This section will only become available when the Miscellaneous function is selected Select the category for this transaction Select Add to add the number of hours or
238. ned this code cannot be changed ID Enter a unique ID number to identify the clock This number will also be programmed into the clock O January 2009 Time America Inc 226 TA100 Pro Manual Description Active RS485 or Serial Modem Ethernet Baud Rate Comm Port Retries Connect wait Enter a description of the clock This description will be seen in the system and on reports This field can be used to describe the clock type and it s location in your facility i e ATS In BUILDING TWO The clock description can be up to 30 characters long Click the Active check box to indicate that the clock is currently in use Uncheck this box if the clock is not being used at this time Select this option to choose an RS485 or RS232 connection Select this option to choose a modem solution Select this option to choose an Ethernet solution Select the applicable communication speed Make sure the baud rate selected here matches the baud rate defined at the clock e RS485 Serial and Ethernet 9600 baud e Modem 2400 baud Select the communications port on your computer that will be used to communicate with the clock The factory default is COM 1 Enter the number of times the computer should attempt to connect to the clock if communication either fails or is interrupted during polling The value entered into this field specifies the greatest amount of time TA100 Pro will wait before deciding the clock
239. nent Selection Select ALL YES or NO to view employees assigned to that option Previous button Press this button to go to an individual who is previous on the list Find button Press this button to search for a name by code last name or badge number Enter in the appropriate name code or badge number when the dialog box appears Next button Press this button to go to an individual who is next on the list Number Select this option to have the employees sort by employee number January 2009 Time America Inc 120 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Definition Name Select this option to have the employees sort by employee name Show Inactives Select this option to have inactive employees viewable in the Employee List Employee Timecard Description Tab The Timecard tab displays the employee s timesheet information NOTE Tasks associated with the Timecard such as editing and adding punches are covered in their own chapter See Timecard and Transaction Maintenance page 160 1 Navigate to the Configure Employee window 2 When you first enter the Configure Employee window the Timecard tab is selected automatically and contains the following information Configure Employee 00001 Timecard Schedule Transactions Status Benefits Messages Wages Badges NMA Detail Washington Carol Department OTI 012 013 Unpaid Dollar S A 07 14 0 OK a 5 00 PE 07 15 03 Tue WORK Division ALL bd 07 16 03 Wed
240. nfigure Employee Schedules page 125 2 Click the Rotate button The Apply Rotating Schedule dialog box will open Apply a Rotating Schedule to 00001 Washing m DEFINE ROTATION Start date 12 13 2002 Fri Days in rotation 7 APPLY ROTATION Start date 12 20 2002 Fri J Include Job Cost information OK Cancel Figure 100 Apply Rotating Schedule 3 Fill in the settings as appropriate Setting Definition O January 2009 Time America Inc 129 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Activate a rotating schedule for this Employee Define Rotation Start Date Days in Rotation Apply Rotation Start Date Definition Check this box to enable a rotating schedule for the selected employee TIP You can remove a rotating schedule that has already been set simply by un checking this box These settings define the pattern for rotation Enter the date TA100 Pro should start with to determine the rotation pattern Enter the number of days in the rotation pattern These settings determine when the rotating schedule will take effect Enter the date on which the rotating schedule should take effect 4 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Schedule screen Create an Employee Schedule Template An employee s schedule can be saved as template so that it can be copied to other employees This is a convenient way of duplicating an unusual work pattern or rotation so that you
241. nfigure Hand Reader Clocks OListed i Miscellaneous Function Keys Proglnto Badge Time Zone Reject Auth Template O Employees Listed HRA Gan Remove All Add All Add Edi Delete 1 Figure 182 Configure Hand Reader Clock Employee tab Setting Employee Listing Division Group Remove All Add All January 2009 Time America Inc Definition Displays a list of the employees that can use this clock Includes employee ID employee name employee badge number assigned time zone personal reject threshold authority level and if they have a hand template saved Click this button to select employees based on Division Employees selected are assigned the default Time Zone Reject Threshold and Authority automatically NOTE If you use this method to choose employees you may want to Edit the employee in order to choose another Time Zone Reject Threshold and Authority Level Click this button to select employees based on Group Employees selected are assigned the default Time Zone Reject Threshold and Authority automatically NOTE If you use this method to choose employees you may want to Edit the employee in order to choose another Time Zone Reject Threshold and Authority Level Click this button to remove all employees currently assigned to the clock Click this button to assign all employees to the clock Employees selected are assigned the default Time Zone Reject Thre
242. ng time cutoff in HH MM before the individual would float into the next schedule Times must be entered in military format Type the individual shift s ending time in HH MM Times must be entered in military format If the shift s stop time rolls over to a new day do you want to process the hours on the day the employee punched In or punched Out Select the n or Out option by clicking the desired field This field automatically displays the total duration of the shift from clock in to clock out This field automatically displays the total number duration of lunches and breaks combined This field automatically displays the total paid hours for the day lt takes into account whether or not breaks and lunches are paid 61 TA100 Pro Manual Lunches Punched Elapsed None SG Max Breaks Punched Elapsed None These settings define how lunches are treated during this shift Check this box to indicate that employees should clock out for and in from lunch Select this option if the shift s lunch period is automatically deducted after a number of elapsed hours If the Punched check box is also selected the punched time overrides the elapsed time In other words if the employee does not punch Out for and In from lunch the shift s lunch period is automatically deducted after the elapsed time Define the elapsed time in the Elapsed Deduct box below If no restrictions apply to the shifts lun
243. nn nn 22 underlined letters 21 Keys NA WAS tcs 16 programmo ee ori Eonar E 22 A A iiie 22 Last PUNCH ccc vite a aia dc 175 Logging Misir nti deh Qulaieiedadnes 19 Main COMPANY cocccccccccconcnononcnanocononnnnnnncnnnna cnn 28 Manual A ae Be a 9 EE eiid oeii a 144 addaa anii id tee 145 COnNfIJU Oiii i idii aiiin iiias 144 Jellena eoin e Glee 146 Mia A Lo 146 allle PA A E deg ceeded 179 MOREM isteir iie sE E ES AEN 197 Multiple MISC c000ciiiocr idol 167 Multiple Miscellaneous 167 271 TA100 Pro Manual INDEX Cont Online TimMeCard ccoooncocinnccnniciconccnnnanananaccnancnos 160 ACCOSSI Y ici 160 NAVIGATING esiin na 161 Optional Modules oooocoonccccnccccconccononaninncccnnnos 114 Bell Schedules occcnccnnnicicicicicicicinaness 83 114 Benefits iia ida 105 114 Overtime configure oarnein 49 Passwords CHANGE sittin a 104 Pay Period CONPIQUIC ice ei a a R 44 PC Clock clocking in and out for the day 116 Policies ci ir did 43 A EA 54 COMU otitis de 43 A E 54 differential ooooooooonnnnninnnnnnicinnnncccccnnncccccnns 52 lira ii anh eis 54 SA AN 53 holIdayS oia a lira 46 OVEMTIMG ooooccccoonoccconononcccnononcnc nan narcnnnnno nn 49 Pay PeriOdS ccoooocccccococcccnononcccnnnannncnnnnns 44 punch defaultS ooooooccccnnnoccccnnnoccccccnnos 44 A ana a e ety 238 Print configure printer occccnccinncccncconocacnnnccnnancno 182 PANIN ias 182 Profile Lockouts
244. nt allowed Day Date Time Amount Archived Category WAL VAC VAC bu 08 73 7001 00 00 07 SOC yO Wed 08 22 2001 00 00 02 8 00 NO Tue 08 21 2001 00 00 02 8 00 NO Delete OK Cancel Figure 108 Benefit Entitlement Details 4 The Benefit Details dialog box contains the following information Setting Day Date Time Amount Archived Category January 2009 Time America Inc Definition Displays the day on which the time was taken Displays the date on which the time was taken Displays the time at which the time was taken Displays the number of hours taken Indicates whether these transactions are in a data set that has already been archived For more information on Archiving see Archive page 260 Displays the category of time taken 138 TA100 Pro Manual Benefit Entitlement Grant Benefit Time With Benefit Entittement you manually enter the amount of hours given for each Benefit Category This is a one time entry 1 Navigate to the Benefits tab of the Configure Employee window 2 Highlight the benefit Category you wish to grant 3 Click the Details button The Benefit Details screen for the selected Category will open Benefit Details for HOL Amount allowed Day Date Tine Amount Archived Category Figure 109 Benefit Details 4 Enter the amount of time you wish to grant in the Amount Allowed box 5 Click OK to commit the change and return to the Benefits scr
245. nu 75 TA100 PRO Time America Inc File Daily Operations Reports System Setup Communications Help EA uno av Help Fl Calculator F2 Calendar Diary F3 About F9 System Configuration Fil Conversion table F12 Macros SHIFT F10 Figure 216 Help Menu Calculator 1 Click the Help menu Calculator The Calculator will open O January 2009 Time America Inc 265 TA100 Pro Manual calculators aI ESSE mc 7 8 s 7 Me 4 5 6 M 172737 M0 t Figure 217 Calculator 2 You may enter numbers and functions by typing or by clicking the appropriate buttons on the keypad Calendar 1 Click the Help menu Calendar The Calendar will open ma colendar oiary AE August 2001 E Su Mo Tuwe Th Fr Sa 5 6 7 8 9 wo 11 12 1314 15 16 17 18 19221 2 23 2425 baie elm lt Month Month gt lt Year Year gt Today Figure 218 Calendar 2 You may scroll through months and years using the navigation buttons NOTE The Calendar can also serve as a daily diary About The About screen displays the serial number information and all extra modules the client has purchased This is also where you can activate the Hand Reader NOTE This only applies to Hand Readers that do not match the Time America internal code and were not purchased directly from Time America 1 Click the Help menu About The About will open 2 Click on Hand Reader Activation button as shown b
246. nual 113 Sentinel System Driver InstallShield Wizard xj Ready to Install the Program N The wizard is ready to begin installation S Click Install to begin the installation Tf you want to review or change any of your installation settings click Back Click Cancel to exit the wizard Cancel lt Back Figure 11 Ready to Install 15 Click Install to begin the installation lala Installing Sentinel System Driver N The program features you selected are being installed S A Please wait while the InstallShield Wizard installs Sentinel System Driver Tes This may take several minutes Status Generating script operations for action Figure 12 Sentinel Drive Installation 16 When the installation is finished the InstallShield Wizard Complete screen will appear Click the Finish button to proceed fe Sentinel System Driver InstallShield Wizard InstallShield Wizard Completed The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed Sentinel System Driver Click Finish to exit the wizard Figure 13 Installation Complete 17 This concludes the installation The Installation Complete message will appear January 2009 Time America Inc 14 TA100 Pro Manual InstallShield Wizard a Foxpro Library Setup is preparing the InstallShield Wizard which will guide you through the program setup process Please wait Figure 14 FoxPro LIB Installation 18 The FoxPro LIB InstallShield Wiza
247. nual Time Enter the time for the transaction HH MM SS Enter this in military time Function Select the type for this transaction The standard options are e Clocked In e Clocked Out e Out for Lunch e In from Lunch e Enter Department e Swipe amp Go e Miscellaneous used for entering absences vacation tips and other categories of time and dollars See Add Miscellaneous Transaction Additional options may appear depending upon your company and clock configuration Clock Select the clock to which the transaction should be attributed 4 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Online Timecard Add Miscellaneous Transaction Transactions can be added from the Online Timecard or from the Transactions tab of the Configure Employee dialog box The method is the same in both locations This option for adding a transaction works best when you are going to manually enter all elements of the transaction 1 Navigate to the Online Timecard for the employee you wish to edit See Online Timecard page 160 Or navigate to the Transactions tab of the Configure Employee dialog box and select the employee for whom you wish to add a transaction See Employee Transactions page 133 2 Click the Add Trans Online Timecard or Add Transactions button The Transaction Detail dialog box will open 3 Select Miscellaneous from the function drop down menu additional information will open January 2009 Time America I
248. o scroll to a pay period a specified number of periods in the past Navigating in the Transactions tab By default the Transactions screen displays the current month s data There is an easy technique for navigating to other months NOTE It may not be possible to edit data in previous months depending upon your security permissions and the number of editable pay period settings For more information see Main Company page 28 and Configure Users page 97 Configure Employee 00001 Timecard schedule Transactions Status Benefits Messages Wages Badges usa Detai Washington Carol Date Day Cat Stat Stop Department Reg O11 O12 073 Unpaid Dolar S Active Template 12 13 02 Fri WORK 06 58 16 01 1 8 00 z 00 E Division ALL E s Group ALL Prior Find lext gt gt 000 1 Carol 12 16 02 Mon WORK 06 57 16 03 1 E z 7 E 12 17 02 Tue WORK 06 58 16 05 1 8 00 y 3 1 00 IM 12 18 02 Wed 15 56 1 2 12 19 02 Thu WORK 07 06 16 06 1 8 00 2 1 00 I 12 20 02 Fri 07 02 1 y 00005 Smith John 00008 kim Auto processing Show Schedule Forecasting Approve A E From 12 09 2002 to 12 22 2002 1270972002 12 10 2002 1211 2002 12 12 2002 42 13 2002 1214 2002 1271572002 T 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 8 00 0 00 0 00 3200 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 100 Loo 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 gt 0 00 0 00 4 00 6 Listed 0 00 0 00 0 00
249. o the start date of the company However this date needs to be no earlier than the start date of the employee that has the most seniority in the company Indicates the date on which the yearly benefits reset previous balance zero out or roll forward and the employee starts earning a new year s benefits Indicates the categories that will be considered when calculating benefits based on hours worked and or paid Click the category to select it A checkmark displays next to categories when they are selected Displays the code for the Category Displays the name of the Category Check this box to indicate that regular hours of the selected category s should be considered when calculating benefits Check this box to indicate that overtime hours of the selected category s should be considered when calculating benefits Check this box to indicate that overtime 2 hours of the selected category s should be considered when calculating benefits 106 TA100 Pro Manual Overtime 3 Check this box to indicate that overtime 3 hours of the selected category s should be considered when calculating benefits Configure Benefit Accumulators Accumulators specify the categories that will be granted by the policy as well as the amounts granted and method of accrual You can have multiple accumulators within one policy 1 While adding or editing a Benefit Accrual click the Add or Edit button in the center of the screen to display t
250. of the terminals with the computer that is running the software You can set the date and time on one or more clocks However all clocks must be defined in Clock Maintenance before the date and time is set Before using this function the host computer must be set to the correct date and time Otherwise all clock transactions will have an incorrect date and time stamp although admittedly they ll all be synchronized NOTE It is recommended that you do not perform this function during periods of high clock activity such as the start of day when employees are clocking In 1 Click the Communications menu Set Date and Time The Set Date and Time Clock Selection dialog box will open ES Set Date and Time Clock Selection x Add Training TASC Clock Add all 3 Available 0 Selected Set Tin Close Date Time Figure 186 Set Date and Time 2 Select the clock s for which you wish to set the date and time by using the Add button to add the selected clock individually or Add All to add all clocks 3 Click the Date Time button to display the Windows Date Time Properties dialog box January 2009 Time America Inc 236 TA100 Pro Manual Date Time Properties Ax Date amp Time Time Zone rf Date Time ME jar 3 1 2 3 A 56789101 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 W 29 30 31 10 43 568PM Y Current time zone US Mountain Standard Time Figur
251. ograms e Generate reports No user interaction is required when using the Auto Process feature In fact you can poll time clocks run reports download payroll data and back up the TA100 Pro data without ever touching the computer The Auto Process feature is ideal for processes that need to be performed after working hours or during less busy times of the day Each automatic procedure can consist of one or more auto process cycles Each cycle can run a program poll the time clocks or generate a report and is assigned a time and day s of the week to run To create an AutoProcess that runs several times a day you will add several cycles one for each time you wish the process to run Run as Service The autoprocess can be configured to run as a service it must be installed locally as it will not run over a network The server must run the service 1 In Windows Explorer find the TA100 Pro folder Locate and double click InstallAutoprocess A black command prompt window will flash 2 In Windows Explorer find the TA100 Pro folder Locate and double click autoProcess this will install the automated User responsible for the Auto Process A white Auto poll dialogue window will appear but will give the message nothing to poll NOTE Toconfirm the success of this action open TA100 PRO click the File menu Security User Maintenance There will be a new user Autoprocess Service 3 Open TA100 PRO click the Communications menu Auto P
252. on O January 2009 Time America Inc 149 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Item Use Hourly Wage Use Piece Rate Calendar Hourly Wage Piece Rate Wage Definition This field will be pre populated with the Departments and Jobs defined in the system Select the item you wish to configure The value for this option is defined in the Configure Department or Job dialog box It will be checked and will reflect the pre defined wage if the Use Hourly Wage setting is checked in the Department or Job dialog box for this item The value for this option is defined in the Configure Department or Job dialog box It will be checked and will reflect the pre defined wage if the Use Piece Rate setting is checked in the Department or Job dialog box for this item The calendar is used both to enter the wage amount and to indicate the effective date of the wage Wages will auto fill from the date entered forward Always enter the wage on the date which you wish it to take effect The Hourly amount field is the top field in the calendar Enter the wage on the date which it becomes effective The Piece Rate amount field is the lower field in the calendar Enter the wage on the date on which it becomes effective 5 Click Close to commit the changes and return to the Wages screen Edit an Employee Level Wage 1 Navigate to the Wages tab of the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee Wages page 146 Select the Non Exemp
253. oncccconnnonancnnanccnnnos 155 Employee Level Wage A aso doc 149 odo ORT 150 TA100 Pro Manual INDEX Cont Employee Maintenace Bennetts ua adi aa 137 VIMO Cards A O 121 Employee Maintenance 119 A ede dai ei at 150 configure employee s s s 119 120 Details eiaeia da 155 Messages iii dt 144 A A e 152 A A tie ade ee 125 Salsa it 134 TransaciiOnS emitidas 133 WES 2 EER 146 Employee SettidgS ooooooonnccccnnnocccccnnnanccccnnns 155 Employee Status CONTIQUIC iii da 134 EMplOYe8S cccconnoccccnonoccncnnnnccnnnnnnecnnnnnnns 119 120 lo A nen Cerna reer re cory aa ae a 156 A vein crete N EN 150 DOMGTIS cores cctsdhertitidhadit n eE 137 o S EIE E E E E aiden titer ie teey 159 details c tidad 155 lt litio bid 157 MESSAGES unicidad 144 PROTIICS utili bas 152 schedule coooocconccccnicccnocinonccnnanaconarrnannna nan 125 selecting ccoocoononococicicnnnccccnanoncncnnnnnnnns 178 179 Sas laa 134 LANMSactiONS sierociniec 133 Wa EEE dice 146 Environment Delle ota 25 Change background cooooccccnocccccnonocccinnnanccnnano 25 large button toolbar 26 Etherneta cat io terra at 197 Exceptions CONTIQU E cocoa oli 53 Exiting TA100 Pro cocconcccococinonocccancccnananannnc cnn 20 EXPO iris tsetse suites Hath nevada cine cents 249 From Schedule cccesceceeceeeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 169 Getting Started cc eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseteeeeneeees 19 CI Dawdezsadureitcasen dees dates 178 message ASSIGNMENL
254. onnect to Third Party clocks such as ATS and Hand Reader The ATS clocks are badge swipe clocks similar to the TA500 and TA600 series Configure ATS Clocks 1 Click the Communications menu Configure ATS The Configure Clocks dialog box will open The Configure dialog box contains several tabs all of which are described below Configure ATS Series Clocks General Miscellaneous Function Keys Code ID T Description W Active Communication AS485 or Serial C Modem C Ethemet More Setup Baud Rate 3600 Hayes Compatable Modem Yes No Comm Port COM 1 gt Modem Number Retries 0 IP Address IP Pott Connect wait 7 5 minutes Validation T Download Numbers for F5 prompt 2 r Setup Time difference between clock and computer 0 Y Division 0000 ABC Manufactoring Company z Idle message r Messages T Download messages I Keyboard Ent Time outs seconds _ y r eee aioe For data input 6 Note Employees without PM Swi dG Displayed messages El essages assigned will wipe and Go eT not be able to punch OListed Anal Gf Cancel Figure 179 Configure ATS Clock 2 The General tab defines communication and operation settings and contains the following information Setting Definition Code This is a required field Enter a unique code up to 4 characters to identify the clock Once defi
255. or details for one category The Accumulator section displays the rules for details already added To display the entry screen for an Accumulator click the Add button This is a required field Enter the number of years of service after which this rule takes effect To have the rule start immediately select 0 Works in conjunction with the months This is a required field Enter the number of months of service after which this rule takes effect To have the rule start immediately select 0 Works in conjunction with the years This setting allows you to grant a one time benefit of this category This field is optional For example you might want to give a length of service bonus of 40 hours on the employee s anniversary in addition to their regular accruals This benefit occurs only once it does not recur each year This setting allows you to enter a set number of hours granted at the end of the Posting Basis period weekly biweekly etc This field is optional For example to grant 8 hours of time per month you would choose Monthly for the Posting Basis and enter 8 in this box This setting allows you to enter the fraction of benefits earned for hours worked and or paid TA100 Pro will calculate the number of hours paid of the categories selected in the Categories to Sum section of the Benefit Accrual dialog box It will multiply the number of hours paid by the number entered here to calculate the available benef
256. or example if 10 00 is entered in this field the system expects an Out punch to be recorded no later than 10 hours after the shift s In punch The default for this field is 18 00 or 18 hours Enter the time in HH MM format to be recorded when the employee is flagged with a Missing Out Punch For example assume an employee is scheduled to work 8 hours and forgets to punch Out If 8 00 is entered in this field the system recognizes the missing Out punch yet totals 8 hours for the employee The default for this field is 00 00 indicating that no time will be totaled for a Missing Out Punch Enter the maximum time an employee who has punched Out can punch back In and still have the new time included in the previous total when calculating daily overtime For example assume that the Maximum Out Punch Link Back is defined as 2 00 and overtime is paid after working 8 hours in a single day If an employee punches In at 8 00 A M and Out at 5 00 P M with a one hour unpaid lunch then punches back In at 6 30 P M within the 2 hour link back and Out again at 9 30 P M the daily total shows 8 hours of regular time and 3 hours of overtime Check this option if the first department and or job transfer after the In punch should be retroactive to the In punch 3 The Holidays tab defines the rules for paying Holidays and contains the following information January 2009 Time America Inc 45 TA100 Pro Manual Configure
257. ose this option you will be given an additional screen to enter the email recipients See Emailing a Report page 195 Email Employee The report will be sent via email If you choose this option you will be given an additional screen to select the employee NOTE Reports can only be Emailed via Microsoft Outlook 187 TA100 Pro Manual 9 When all settings are complete click the OK button to run the report NOTE Some reports may prompt for additional information particular to the specific report at this point You may also be prompted for Email recipient information if you choose to send the report via email 10 The report will output to your choice Screen Printer File or Email 11 After receiving the report click the Close button until you have exited all the dialog boxes Running a Report by Individual 1 Click the Reports button to display the report categories 2 Select the category in which you wish to search The Select Report list for that category will appear NOTE The Location feature allows you to move a report from one report category to another Reports and Listings Selection F Eal i AT Time Card One Line al Time Card One Line T4200 Es Ue Time Card Category Summary Em Time Card Dept EN Pot Time Card Dept Summary 2 Esports Hole Shift Summary Time Card Differential Who s Scheduled Time Card Diff Cat Summary Coverage Approved Timecards Unappr
258. ot applicable On most modems the wait symbol is a comma typically representing a one second pause Multiple wait symbols can be used if necessary These fields control the time of day the clock s internal modem will answer an incoming call Enter the modem s start and stop answer time in military format HH MM For example to set the modem to answer only between 7 00 A M and 6 00 P M enter 07 00 and 18 00 in the fields provided The default is 00 00 midnight and 23 59 one minute before midnight In other words the modem will answer any time it is called during the day Enter the number of rings that the clock should wait before picking up the line For example setting the Ring Delay to 4 means that after the clock detects a ringing phone it will wait 4 rings before answering 0 means DO NOT ANSWER Enter the number of times the computer should attempt to connect to the clock if communication either fails or is interrupted during polling Enter the time difference in hours between the computer and time clock Since the computer can set the clock s time this field compensates for time zone differences between the computer s location and the clock s location When the clock s time is set the system either adds or subtracts this time difference from the computer s clock A setting of 0 indicates that the clock and computer are in the same time zone Select the company division where the clock i
259. ou wish to print the report If you have chosen Range select the starting and ending employees TA100 Pro will print all employees between the selected individuals inclusive Departments Select the Departments for which you wish to print the report If you have chosen Range select the starting and ending Departments TA100 Pro will print employees in all Departments between the selected items inclusive Divisions Select the Divisions for which you wish to print the report If you have chosen Range select the starting and ending Division TA100 Pro will print employees in all Divisions between the selected items inclusive Groups Select the Groups for which you wish to print the report If you have chosen Range select the starting and ending Groups TA100 Pro will print employees in all Groups between the selected items inclusive 7 When all settings are complete click OK to proceed to the Additional Reporting Parameters dialog box Additional Reporting Parameters STATUS Full time O Part time SORT BY O Number GROUP BY None OUTPUT TO Screen O E mail Both Both O Permanent O Hourly O Temporary O Salary Name O Department Division Group C Printer CI File C E mail Employee Figure 158 Additional Reporting Parameters 8 The Additional Parameters dialog allows you to further filter and group report data Fill in the settings as appropriate Setting Status
260. oved Timecards Employee Wage Individual Schedule Employee Wage with Category Department Wage Level Distribution Y ORarges Run Close Listings Figure 159 Example Select Report dialog box 3 Highlight the report you wish to run 4 Select the Individuals option 5 Click the Run button The Report Parameter Selection dialog box will open Pay period Pay Periods back xil 02 15 2009 a O speci 500 O Yesterday Policy Forecasting O Today Period Y Reprocess Employees active Olnactive Call ANDERSON FRAME 00009 0 RETA gt JONES DAVID 00004 Add all SMITH JOHN 00005 SAMPLE JOE 12345 WASHINGTON CAROL Department Division Group v 4 Available Remove all 2 Selected Figure 160 Report Parameter Selection lo A 6 Fill in the settings as appropriate O January 2009 Time America Inc 188 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Pay Period Pay Periods Back Select Policy Period Special Start Stop O January 2009 Time America Inc Definition Select this option to run the report for a pay period You will need to fill in the rest of the pay period options that become available when the option is selected Policy Select the policy that contains the pay period definition you wish to use Pay Periods Back Enter the number of pay periods in the past for which to run the report Verif
261. p Search ais 24 Return to the Help Topics Window i da 24 Print a Help Lope 24 CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM ENVIRONMENT 00 ccccsssscecsesceceessececsesaececseceecsesaeeecsesaececsaseeceesaeeecseseeeeeaeeeceesaeeeeseeaeeess 25 Play BN sici n 25 Change Screen Background a E E 25 Navigation Selection isa 26 CHAPTER IV CONFIGURATION sissssveccssescesecsssensestessesasssscesssseccecessonsssnctoseseesuesestesdesessesnesssaessecsssestsoutsessesesses 27 MAIN COMPANY acieta a da teaches ona neds an Anite a ecam hh 28 IDIARI LOIN atlas a de Gani ende ete a el ld on 34 Configure DIVISIONS iii ai nao il aia S E dada a sti 34 Adda DIVISION neien seus ea ie Fa gn ta a sas aa doa we aa N E A Eaa a AIEA AA ETEEN E E NES 35 Edit A US ON iaire na Ea O 35 Delete a Divisioni arininata Ea aE E AETA EAEE AENEA E E AROAK EA TAA EEE ORNE E NIREA eR RA ETE E 35 CATEGORIES e riesia aii 37 Configure Cafe roles dai 38 Ada CALE ROMY Aedes 41 Edita CALE rola ia RIAD saan A ao ALAS AAAS O EEE E Meas E ATTA 4 Delete CAC A AS poapyases sans R E AA E as 42 NAAA eee eee 43 Configure PONCIOS usa oo aire E aN S e a EE calgoanselbanses vag eiii ista 43 January 2009 Time America Inc TA100 Pro Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont AI POLICY E NN 54 Edita Polyp ee A E EEEE OE E EERS 54 Delete a POl A RS e e aa aE a A eE a e Tee i E EE aaa 54 O O O SOS E AS 56 Configure Shift Group cocaina adn rap Ja chuecisededocsdutedeadessdbsbeastnesiondvdpsvcaracessbiget deere 56 Add
262. pt for the transaction Input Displays any additional data entered with the transaction such as a Department number the number of pieces produced etc Add Edit Delete For more information on adding editing and deleting transactions see Adding and Editing Transactions page 162 and Deleting Transactions page 169 Employee Status Tab The Status tab displays the employee s current work status with the company Configure Employee Status 1 Navigate to the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee page 119 2 Click the Status tab to display the following information Configure Employee 00005 Timecard Schedule Transactions iS Smith John STATUS Active Template Division ALL d Group ALL h 00001 Washington Carol 00002 Baines Peter 00003 Anderson Frank 00004 Jones David Benefits Messages Wages Badges NU Y Detail Date Policies Active Fulltime 11 22 2002 001 YES YES Permanent YES 5 Listed Number C Name 4 Show Inactives Add Edit Delete Print Close Figure 104 Configure Employee Status tab Setting Definition Date Enter the effective date of the status Policies Select the Policy to be assigned to this employee Active Select whether the employee is Active or Inactive as of the effective date O January 2009 Time America Inc 134 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Definition Fulltime Select whether the employee is Ful
263. ption is Edit For more information on this feature see Main Company page 28 Defines the user s access rights to Divisions settings The options are View Add Edit and Delete For more information on this feature see Divisions page 34 Defines the user s access rights to Categories settings The options are View Add Edit and Delete For more information on this feature see Categories page 37 Defines the user s access rights to Policies settings The options are View Add Edit and Delete For more information on this feature see Policies page 43 Defines the user s access rights to Shifts settings The options are View Add Edit and Delete For more information on this feature see Shifts page 56 Defines the user s access rights to Holidays settings The options are View Add Edit and Delete For more information on this feature see Holidays page 67 Defines the user s access rights to Groups settings The options are View Add Edit and Delete For more information on this feature see Groups page 72 Defines the user s access rights to Department settings The options are View Add Edit and Delete For more information on this feature see Departments page 75 Defines the user s access rights to Job settings The options are View Add Edit and Delete For more information on this feature see Configure Jobs page 79 94 TA100 Pro Manual Bell Schedules Defines the user
264. qualifying days are required Select an option to indicate which days the employee must work to qualify for holiday pay Before and After Employee must work the scheduled day before and after the holiday to receive holiday pay Before or After Employee must work the scheduled day before or after the holiday to receive holiday pay None There are no requirements for the employee to qualify for holiday pay Enter the number of hours that must be worked on the day prior to the holiday in order for that day to qualify as having been worked Enter the number of hours that must be worked on the day after the holiday in order for that day to qualify as having been worked These settings define how the Holiday pay will be allocated 46 TA100 Pro Manual Apply Holiday when not scheduled to work Holiday hours can accrue toward overtime Hours to add for each worked holiday Multiply worked holiday hours to apply to HOL Hours to add for each unworked holiday Given Minimum Given Maximum O January 2009 Time America Inc Check this option if the holiday hours can be given to an employee who is not scheduled to work on the holiday Check this option if holiday hours and added holiday time count toward overtime For example assume an employee works 44 hours during a week and one 8 hour holiday occurs If this option is checked and overtime is paid after 40 hours the employee receives 40 hours reg
265. r 00002 Jones David 00004 Smith John 00005 Washington Carol 00001 lt 5 Listed O Number Name V Show Inactives Timecard Schedule Transactions Status Benefits a Messages Wages Badges Clocks Detail Add J Edt Delete Print Close Figure 128 Configure Employee Details tab Setting Definition Number Social Security Birth date Last Name First Name Middle Initial Address City January 2009 Time America Inc This is a required field Enter a code from 2 to 10 characters in length to identify the employee The code s maximum length and type numeric or alphanumeric are defined in the System Defaults dialog box in Company Setup Numeric fields are zero filled NOTE Once saved the employee code cannot be modified except through Utilities Enter the employee s social security number Enter the employee s birth date if desired Enter the employee s last name Enter the employee s first name Enter the employee s middle initial Enter the employee s address Two lines are available Enter the employee s City 155 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Definition Zip Enter the employee s Zip code State Enter the employee s State Phone Enter the employee s phone number Email Address Enter the employee s email address Hire Date Enter the employee s hire date Accrue this Check this box if benefits should accrue during
266. rd will appear The FoxPro LIB is for the TA100 Pro database files ig Foxpro Library InstallShield Wizard x Welcome to the InstallShield Wizard for Foxpro Library The InstallShield R Wizard will install Foxpro Library on your computer To continue click Next WARNING This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Figure 15 FoxPro InstallShield Wizard 19 Click the Next button to begin the FoxPro LIB installation The Ready to Install screen will appear j Foxpro Library InstallShield Wizard ll Installing Foxpro Library N The program features you selected are being installed S Please wait while the InstallShield Wizard installs Foxpro Library This may take several minutes Status Installonield Figure 16 FoxPro LIB Installation 20 When the installation is finished the InstallShield Wizard Complete screen will appear Click the Finish button to proceed January 2009 Time America Inc 15 TA100 Pro Manual 21 Click OK TA100 Pro will now appear in your Start Menu and on your desktop 22 You must attach a hardware key to the computer s parallel port prior to being able to start and operated TA100 Pro See Hardware Keys Hardware Keys When the installation is complete a hardware key must be attached to the computer s parallel port in order to start and operate the TA100 Pro software There are three types of hardware keys each designed for a spec
267. reated in several file types including RTF PDF and Excel Email The report will be sent via email If you choose this option you will be given an additional screen to enter the email recipients See Emailing a Report page 195 Email Employee The report will be sent via email If you choose this option you will be given an additional screen to select the employee 10 When all settings are complete click the OK button to run the report NOTE At this point some reports may prompt for additional information particular to that specific report You may also be prompted for Email recipient information if you choose to send a report via email 11 The report will output to your choice Screen Printer File or Email 12 After receiving the report click the Close button until you have exited all the dialog boxes On Screen Report Preview If you chose to output the report to Screen a Report Preview window will open This window will display the report as it will be printed and allows you to print directly from this window 1 Run the report of your choice selecting Output to Screen See Running a Report page 183 2 The Report Designer window for the selected report will open to preview your report O January 2009 Time America Inc 193 TA100 Pro Manual G Report Designer timecard frx Page 1 Genesis Pro Time America Inc Y File Edit Reports Configure Clocks Help 18 x 18 x IA
268. rica Inc 156 TA100 Pro Manual NA 20 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Fill in the settings as described in the Configure Employees Details section Click OK to commit the changes and continue to the next screen The Status dialog box will open See Employee Status page 134 When all settings are complete click Close to continue to the next screen The Assignment Start Date dialog box will open Choose the date on which you want the employee s schedule to start Assignment Start Date DATE i Today C Other 12 Friday Start Assignments on f1 Continue Figure 129 Assignment Start Date When all settings are complete click the Continue button to advance to the next screen The Schedule dialog box will open See Employee Schedule page 125 When all settings are complete click the OK button to advance to the next screen The Message Assignment dialog box will open See Employee Messages page 144 When all settings are complete click the Close button to advance to the next screen The Wage Assignment dialog box will open See Employee Wages page 146 When all settings are complete click the OK button to advance to the next screen The Badge Assignment dialog box will open See Employee Badges page 150 When all settings are complete click the Close button to advance to the next screen The Clocks dialog box will open See Employee Clocks page 150
269. rocess In the Configure Auto Processing dialog window select 1000 Autoprocess Service click Edit and configure your specific auto process features see Add an AutoProcess 4 Locate your system Services window and Start the Time America Auto Process or 5 In Windows Explorer find the TA100 PRO folder Locate and double click autoProcessServiceSetup this will allow you to start the automated service 6 Click the Start button If you want the service to start when the operating system is starting check the appropriate box January 2009 Time America Inc 240 TA100 Pro Manual Time America Autoprocess Service Service Add an AutoProcess 1 Click the Communications menu AutoProcess The Configure Auto Process dialog box will open 2 Click the Add button and the Auto Process Maintenance dialog box will open Auto Process Maintenance 3 Number f 0001 Name Polling Time Description SMTWTFS Type Figure 189 Configure Auto Process 3 Enter the Number and Name for this Auto Process 4 Click the Add button The Auto Process Schedule Details dialog box will open Auto Process Schedule Details Description y Process Run a File Poll clocks C Run Reports Reindex Time foo 00 Poll Options IV Sunday Code Clock Twe ComPath Port Status Y Monday 2 Training ATS LAN 1 2 M Tuesday 5 TASC Clock TASC Direct 1 a Wenas IV Thursday El F Friday Tag All Untag all IV Saturday
270. roup you wish to choose TIP To choose a single group select the same Group in both boxes Click OK to accept the changes and return to the dialog box All employees in the selected Groups will appear in the Selected list on the right Select Employees by Division e Click the Division button The Division Selection dialog box will open Division Selection SELECT From EE AMERICA INC Zi To 0000 TIME AMERICA INC x OK Cancel Figure 162 Division Selection e Use the drop down to select in the From box to select the first Division you wish to choose Use the drop down to select in the To box to select the first Division you wish to choose TIP To choose a single Division select the same Division in both boxes Click OK to accept the changes and return to the dialog box All employees in the selected Divisions will appear in the Selected list on the right January 2009 Time America Inc 191 TA100 Pro Manual 8 When all settings are complete click OK to proceed to the Additional Reporting Parameters dialog box Additional Reporting Parameters STATUS Full time Part time SORT BY O Number GROUP BY None OUTPUT TO Screen C E mail Both Both O Permanent O Hourly O Temporary O Salary Name O Department O Division Group C Printer C File C E mail Employee Figure 163 Additional Reporting Parameters 9 The Additional Parameters
271. s Enter the second line of your company s primary address such as suite number This field can accept up to 30 characters and may be left blank Enter your company s primary address City This field can accept up to 30 characters Enter the two character code for your company s State TA100 Pro automatically capitalizes your entry Enter your company s zip code You may enter the 5 or 9 digit zip code Enter your company s primary phone number Enter your company s primary fax number January 2009 Time America Inc 28 TA100 Pro Manual 3 When all settings are complete click the Configure tab The Configure screen will appear Configure Main Company General Configure Defaults Exports Use Flags and System Settings Daylight savings Tip Reporting Divisions v Wages lt Department Overtime Level 2 Job Dvertime Level 3 Lunches v Use Swipe and Go Use am pm Format 88 E E x Breaks KI Regional Settings Use level wage before default assignment wage Paid lunches and breaks do not accrue towards OT Use SMTP for E mail Do not use Floater for shift selection 2 Editable Pay Periods plus O days 2 Approval Editor Pay Periods Back Auto logout after 0 minutes 0 No auto logout Auto logout at 00 00 00 00 No auto logout Currency Name Dollar Date Format American MM DDAYYYY Date Delimiter
272. s located Every transaction entered on this clock is tagged with this division code These options define supervisor settings for the clock 201 TA100 Pro Manual Prefix for Entry Prefix for Recall Default Date Default Time Input Initial Source Swipe Key Bar Code Employee Badge Source By Supervisor Swipe Key Bar Code O January 2009 Time America Inc Enter the prefix code used by the terminal to identify a supervisor s badge Any badge starting with this prefix can access the clock s Supervisor Mode Using this mode a supervisor can add view or delete transactions in the time clock The default prefix is 11 For example badge number 112345 can access Supervisor Mode Enter the prefix code used by the terminal to identify a recall badge Any badge starting with this prefix can access the clock s Recall Mode In Recall Mode a person can view previous time transactions but not add edit or delete transactions Check this box to automatically use the clock s current date for transactions added using a supervisor s badge When this check box is clear the clock prompts the supervisor for the date of any new transactions Check this box to automatically use the clock s current time for transactions added using a supervisor s badge When this check box is clear the clock prompts the supervisor for the time of any new transactions These settings determine how data can put entered
273. s only available when you are adding or editing a Shift as opposed to the Shift Group It defines the settings for a selected Shift within the Shift Group and contains the following information Configure Shifts 100 Details Standard 30 Min Lunch 00 00 06 00 12 00 18 00 24 00 a Shift Number Start 00 Cutoff 07 15 Stop 15 30 Process On In OOut Gross Lunch Breaks Total Lunches Breaks Exceptions V Punched v Punched Start Stop Punch type O Window O Window 1 00 00 00 00 Elapsed O Elapsed 2 00 f 00 00 Hoo O None None 3 oojoo oo Hoo SG Max 00 45 SG Max 00 20 s Window Deduct Elapsed Deduct Punched Type Paid Dut In Duration Pay Outside Elapsed From Deduct Break vw Y oo Lunch Break Y None 005115 00 30 005115 fest te p J ooh 06 00 Punch 001 30 Hoo foa 4 Listed i i 00 Cancel Figure 46 Shifts Shift Details tab O January 2009 Setting Graphic Shift Number Start Cutoff Stop Process On Gross Lunch Breaks Totals Time America Inc Definition Use the graphic timeline to define the individual start and stop time of a shift Enter a unique number up to 3 digits to identify the individual shift Type the individual shift s starting time in HH MM Times must be entered in military format Type the individual shift s latest starti
274. s the baud rate defined at the clock TIP You can use the Configuration Badge 000000000 at the clock to view modify the clock s baud rate Enter the clock s unique identification number in this field This number provides a way for the system to distinguish between individual clocks Any one character alphabetic or numeric ID may be used Make sure the LAN ID defined here matches the LAN ID defined at the clock TIP You can use the Configuration Badge 000000000 at the clock to view modify the clock s LAN ID Select the type of converter used in the LAN setup The RTS converters have been phased out over the years and were mainly used with AT style computers that used a 25 pin serial port Most new computers use 9 pin serial ports that connect to the newer SD style converters If you are unsure which you have contact your dealer Select the modem s communication speed The default baud rate for the TASC clock is 1200 Make sure the baud rate selected here matches the baud rate defined at the clock 220 TA100 Pro Manual Phone Number Start Stop Answer Ring Delay Number of Retries Time Difference Between Computer and Clock Division Supervisor Badge O January 2009 Time America Inc Enter the phone number the PC modem must dial to communicate with this clock The number must be entered in the following format Outside Line Access Code Wait Symbol Area Code Phone Number If no out
275. s to Use PE Clock oi tt ie 116 Default Clock IA oa Aia dis ii 117 Default Clock Out iii e ie 117 Default Clock Out Jor Lunch it ii dia acid 118 Default Clock In from Lunch aiii te let 118 Default Transfer Department dese 118 CHAPTER VII EMPLOYEE MAINTENANTCE cscssssssssssssessrsesscssssessessssssessssessesessessessrsessessssessesersesees 119 CONFIGURE EMPLOYEE cean nn N E A a 119 EMPLOYER DAS KRE E dup E E A E A A 120 EMPLOYEE TIMECARD DESCRIPTION TAB ssssccesssececesseececsncceceesaececsesaececseceecsesaeeecseaeececseeeceesaeeecsesaeeeeneaeeenenee 121 EMPLOYEE SCHEDULE TAB A oie 125 Configure Employee Schedules reiissi nr ee aa aE N a TAA ea AOE OESE aE RE 125 Assign or Edit an Employee Schedule ooooniocciccnicunoconononnnnnncnnn cono cnno cono nono nnnonn nono nnnn cnn oeaan T Ne cnn cre cn ncon arranca 126 Delete a Schedule ipod altea E E E A EEA 128 Created Rotating Schedule Loi rea day EE a aaa E O E aAa ESE AEN REEE A 129 Create an Employee Schedule Template onooncninninonnncnnocnnonannnnononnncnnn cono cn neon no nono nn nena conan naar nn cnn n cre nnn canina necia 130 Copy an Employee Schedule Template oooonnccincnoninoninnnonanonanonnnonnnnnncnnn cono cn neon crono EEEa ESER creia 131 EMPLOYEE TRANSACTIONS TAB a 133 Description onee ni eeri Ee d a tages Cube aw ae bena ee needed 133 EMPLOYEE STATUS PAB oy shee Shes costeccssteudous ackecatys sides evecengs sgn tous cvecscertpecsans EE TEA ENTIA EEE EEE
276. se Back Office California etc 8 Click the Yes button to continue You will be returned to the General tab Fill in the settings as described in the Configure section for the appropriate clock See TA500 600 page 198 ATS page 226 Hand Reader page 229 10 When all settings are complete click OK to commit the changes Edit a Clock 1 Click the Communications menu Configure and select the type of clock you wish to edit The Configure Clock dialog box will open 2 Highlight the Clock you wish to edit using the drop down list at the top of the screen 3 Click the Edit button The General screen will become available for you to edit the selected category 4 Edit the settings as described in the Configure Clock section for the clock you are editing 5 When all settings are complete click OK to commit the changes Delete a Clock 1 Click the Communications menu Configure and select the type of clock you wish to edit The Configure Clock dialog box will open 2 Highlight the Clock you wish to edit using the drop down list at the top of the screen 3 Click the Delete button You will be prompted January 2009 Time America Inc 235 TA100 Pro Manual x 7 Are you sure you want to delete Figure 185 Deletion Confirmation 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion 5 Click Close to exit the Configure Clock dialog box Set Date and Time The Set Date and Time function synchronizes the date and time
277. se prior to Reindexing Repairing fixes inconsistencies and potential problems in the data See Repair Databases page 253 TIP Reindex can be set as an AutoProcess See Configure an AutoProcess page 240 1 Click the File menu Utilities Reindex Databases The Reindex Selection dialog box will open Reindex Selection i ACRLACUM DEF JACRLADJ DBF Add JACRLCAT DBF JACRLDET DBF Add all JACRLTOT DBF ARPTINFO DBF ARPTSEL DBF Bemove ARPTUSER DBF E ATTEND DBF Remove all AUTOCLK DBF JAUTOPOLL DBF z al 109 Available O Selected Gk Cancel l Figure 202 Reindex Selection January 2009 Time America Inc 253 TA100 Pro Manual 2 Select the database you wish to reindex by clicking Add to select an individual database or Add All to add all It is recommended that you reindex all files 3 Click OK to begin the reindexing process Update Databases The Update Databases utility is used when upgrading TA100 Pro to a newer version of the software lt makes all the required modifications to your current database so that it operates with any new file structures 1 Click the File menu Utilities Repair Databases The Update and Compare prompt will appear gt Do you want to compare and update tables Figure 203 Repair Selection 2 Click OK to begin the updating process Initialize Databases The Initialize Databases utility completely removes the contents of databas
278. sesnaceeteeess 9 DDISCLATMER ii A ad tii ada bs 9 NANA AA O OS 9 When Calling Technical Support for Assistance ccsccceesecesnceessecesnceesseceuceeesseceuneeesseceeneeeasecsneeeaaeceeneeeaaeceeneeenaess 9 CHAPTER II INS TALIA TION Gicvisscnnscescsdecedsccnsesensesesedescesesteiadesscedceseseesasasedeseseeiadeseceadesessosesesedsddecessevassdectoces 10 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS a 10 INSTALLING THE SYSTEM ts ic 10 HARDWARE KBYS SO e PAE AAE eh ee a ea 16 Main SySteM BOY cis cei sc cc ohsns tic becas 16 POULIN e as 16 Dom sion 17 CHAPTER IM GETTING STARTED isvscssccessesessssesonstesxesessesseccssectesesessenscssesdesassesxescsesdecedsssxesedeessesesstessassesteses 19 STARTING TA 100 PRO AND LOGGING No a e E a a a e r a a E aa E r EEEa a Es 19 Note on User ACCOUNIS voasiet niaii EEE E E AEE A E E E e EEEE EIERS EAEE E AES SNEEN 19 Launching and Logging In to TA100 PrO osoeeseesesesseseseesesreeresrerreseseessesresrsserrrnsesresrestnsestrnsessesteneseeetssree 19 Exiting the Systems En E E E AR EEE E E E E T SA EA 20 BL ASS WB 5 S IN 2 SREE EE E E E E E EE E E E 21 USING THE KEYBOARD A EVES nee 21 Underlined Letters ocio iii N TEETE ARNEE AER ecadsus eas vgevacccedvesveodsaatecses sede 21 Hot Keys O A OT 22 Additional Keyboard Acces aia ai ai ie aseado ia eta 22 HE dd ais 23 Access the Online Help Windo Winona eos dosis teca 23 Use Help CONTNES is io oa EE E aE e E A E S EAE AS NNT ORS 23 Usethe Help Index unit eee alicia cs essa 23 Use Hel
279. shold and Authority automatically NOTE If you use this method to choose employees you may want to Edit the employee in order to choose another Time Zone Reject Threshold and Authority 233 TA100 Pro Manual Add Add a Clock Click this button to select employees individually You will be prompted to select the following Time Zone Select the Time Zone defined on the previous tab that applies to this employee Reject Override The reject threshold indicates how closely the hand has to match the original scanned hand template The lower the number the more exact the match needs to be 0 is default and indicates that the default clock threshold set on the Miscellaneous tab will be used Authority Level The Authority Level defines which clock menus employee can view or use at the clock 0 is the lowest employee and default 5 is the highest and allows complete at the clock setup supervisor Click the Communications menu Configure and select the type of clock you wish to add The Configure Clock dialog box will open Click the Add button If this is the first clock of this type that you are adding the General tab will become available Configure TA600 Series Clocks General Configure Code Description M Active p Communication r Lan Path Direct R5232 Baudrate 5600 Pot COM1 z SerialBaud 3600 LAN ID 77
280. side line is required such as 9 simply enter the phone number Omit the area code if not applicable On most modems the wait symbol is a comma typically representing a one second pause Multiple wait symbols can be used if necessary These fields control the time of day the clock s internal modem will answer an incoming call Enter the modem s start and stop answer time in military format HH MM For example to set the modem to answer only between 7 00 A M and 6 00 P M enter 07 00 and 18 00 in the fields provided The default is 00 00 midnight and 23 59 one minute before midnight In other words the modem will answer any time it is called during the day Enter the number of rings that the clock should wait before picking up the line For example setting the Ring Delay to 4 means that after the clock detects a ringing phone it will wait 4 rings before answering 0 means DO NOT ANSWER Enter the number of times the computer should attempt to connect to the clock if communication either fails or is interrupted during polling Enter the time difference in hours between the computer and time clock Since the computer can set the clock s time this field compensates for time zone differences between the computer s location and the clock s location When the clock s time is set the system either adds or subtracts this time difference from the computer s clock A setting of 0 indicates that the clock
281. st defined rounding increment Punches occurring from the minute indicated will round forward to the next defined rounding increment Fields in the Stop column allow the rounding of Out punches based on the scheduled stop times These settings define rounding rules to round the duration of the work period as opposed to the start time Identifies the number of minutes before the scheduled Stop time that will round back prior to the scheduled Stop time Identifies the number of minutes that are rounded forward to the scheduled Stop time Identifies the number of minutes after the scheduled Stop time that will round back to the scheduled Stop time The Outside Round box is for additional rounding rules not covered in the ranges above Both the Start and Stop category has its own set of outside rounding parameters Rounding may be minute to minute 0 or in set increments of 3 6 15 30 or 60 minutes Click the arrow to display valid entries then select the increment desired For example entering 15 in this field means that for punches occurring outside the Scheduled Start time round to the nearest 15 minutes using the Round Back and Round Forward rules specified below Punches occurring through the minute specified will round back to the last defined rounding increment Punches occurring from the minute indicated will round forward to the next defined rounding increment 60 TA100 Pro Manual 4 The Details tab i
282. stem Setup menu Groups The Configure Groups dialog box will open Highlight the Group you wish to delete from the list at the side of the screen Click the Delete button You will be prompted xi 7 Are you sure you want to delete Figure 56 Deletion Confirmation 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion 5 Click Close to exit the Configure Groups dialog box January 2009 Time America Inc 74 TA100 Pro Manual Departments Departments are the top level in Job Costing Departments indicate the business unit or section of the company that employees work for and are used to track where employees spend their time Departments serve many purposes in TA100 Pro Employees can track their time to a department by clocking into and or transferring to the department Wages can be associated with the department and employee enabling accurate department costing Hours and wage budgets can be set for the department enabling accurate budget vs actual reporting Reports can be filtered and grouped by department Departments are optional and only available when the Department Use Flag is checked on the Configure tab of the Main Company dialog box Also if you changed the name used to refer to Departments on the Defaults tab of the Main Company dialog box that name will be used in lieu of Department For more information see Main Company page 28 Some examples of departments are e Accounting e Administration e Customer Servic
283. t Elapsed From Deduct O January 2009 Time America Inc If Swipe and Go is in use this tells TA100 Pro what the maximum amount of time a lunch or break can be Enter time in military format TA100 Pro will then take all the punches and measure the duration between transactions If the duration is longer than the SG Max it will move to the next option Enter the time frames for exception transactions in this box These are the time frames in which employees are not supposed to be punching If a punch falls within these time frames it is reported on the Punch Interval Exceptions report and to the Approval Editor as an exception or violation that needs supervisor approval Type the starting time of the exception in HH MM Time must be entered in military format Type the ending time of the exception in HH MM Time must be entered in military format Select In or Out to indicate that the exception applies to an In or Out punch Click the down arrow to the right of the Type field and select the type of period Lunch Break or None to be defined in this row For example to define a windowed lunch period select Lunch as the Type For windowed lunches or breaks if the lunch or break is paid select the Paid check box Otherwise clear this box to indicate an unpaid lunch or break These settings define the parameters for Elapsed Lunches and Breaks If Elapsed is selected in either the Lunch or Breaks sections you
284. t punch for Lunches and Breaks and Transfer Departments from their PC PC Clock offers employees access to several useful tools in an easy to use environment Each task employees can perform with PC Clock is one or two mouse clicks away NOTE It is recommended that a facilitator go over the information available in this chapter with employees Accessing PC Clock e Click the Start menu Programs TA100 Pro and PC Clock Default Settings to Use PC Clock C Clock Time America Inc P FUNCTION KEYS Dut For Lunch Cash Tips n From Lunch Out For Break In From Break p g g g B E Jo Es Es Es Es Es o o Es Es Close Figure 92 PC Clock 1 The PC Clock window contains the following information Settin Definition PC Clock Screen Displays the date and time and what information PC Clock is prompting you for O January 2009 Time America Inc 116 TA100 Pro Manual Function Keys 1 Key 2 Key 3 Key 4 Key 5 Key 6 Key 7 Key 8 Key 9 Key In Key 0 Key Out Key Clear Key Back Key Enter Key Close Button Default Clock In Displays the number keys and the prompts that they will ask for This key is undefined This key is undefined This key is undefined Click this key to punch Out for Lunch Click this key to report Cash Tips Click this key to punch In from Lunch Click this key to punch Out for Break This key
285. t option Click the Department or Job button depending upon choice The Level Wage Details dialog box will open 4 Edit the settings as described in the Add an Employee Level Wage section Click Close to commit the changes and return to the Wages screen Employee Badges Tab The Badges dialog box is used to assign the employee s badge number Configure Employee Badges 1 Navigate to the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee page 119 2 Click the Badges tab to display the following information January 2009 Time America Inc 150 TA100 Pro Manual Configure Employee 01231 Siddons Kim Active Division ALL bd Group ALL y lt lt Prior Find Next 00001 Washington Carol 00002 Baines Peter BADGES ASSIGNED Number Valid 00003 Anderson Frank 00004 Jones David 00005 Smith John 6 Listed Number C Name Y Show Inactives Add Edit Delete Print Close Figure 123 Employee Maintenance Badges tab Setting Definition Number Displays the badge number assigned to the employee Valid Indicates whether or not the badge is valid and can be used by this employee When an employee is assigned another badge make the original badge invalid so that this employee cannot use it any longer Add a Badge 1 Navigate to the Badges tab of the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee Badges page 150 2 Click the Add button to add a new Badge The Assign
286. t the changes and return to the Configure Benefit Accrual screen 7 Click Close to exit the Configure Benefit Accrual dialog box Delete a Benefit Accruals policy Benefit Accruals that are in use cannot be deleted 1 Click the Daily Operations menu Benefit Accruals The Configure Benefit Accruals dialog box will open 2 Highlight the Benefit Accruals policy you wish to delete from the list at the side of the screen 3 Click the Delete button You will be prompted Confirmation x Are you sure you want to delete Figure 90 Deletion Confirmation 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion 5 Click Close to exit the Configure Benefit Accruals dialog box January 2009 Time America Inc 112 TA100 Pro Manual Update to Current This command causes TA100 Pro to calculate all employees benefit accruals up to the current date 1 Click the Daily Operations menu Benefit Accruals Update to Current TA100 Pro will automatically update employee benefits eco a gt gt Processing benefit accruals 100 EMPLOYEE NUMBER 00005 5of5 Figure 91 Benefit Accruals Update to Current O January 2009 Time America Inc 113 TA100 Pro Manual Chapter V Optional Modules This section reviews the optional modules that are available with TA100 Pro This section includes the following e Bell Schedules e Benefits Accruals e PC Clock e Third Party Terminals Bell Schedules The Bell Schedules module al
287. tab grants access to features under the File menu and contains the following information Configure Security Levels MGR Code N Managed Y ii if oie ms Set Date and Time v Print Lists FT File Daily Operations Reports System Setup Communication Security Utilities Other View Add Edit Del Reindex Repair Update Purge A files Import Users Set Reprocess Date Archive and Restore Export Define Levels Fix Unassigned badges System Backup v Print Setup Who is in Repost from R files System Restore Initialize can only be done by SYSOP 2 Listed Check all Figure 69 Security Levels File tab Setting Definition Security This section defines the user s access rights to the File Security menu s features Users Defines the user s access rights to User Maintenance settings The options are View Add Edit and or Delete For more information on User Maintenance see page 97 Define Levels Defines the user s access rights to Security Levels settings The option is View Who is in Defines the user s access rights to the Who s In screen The option is View Utilities This section defines the user s access rights to the File Utilities menu s features NOTE Typically these are reserved for the system administrator January 2009 Time America Inc 88 TA1
288. te set on the Detail tab for information purposes Days of Service Displays the number of Days of Service the employee has for information purposes Code Displays the category code of the benefit e VAC SICK etc Description Displays the category name of the benefit i e Vacation Sick etc Given Displays the number of hours the employee has been granted through Benefit Entitlement Taken Displays the number of hours of the benefit the January 2009 Time America Inc employee has already taken This number is calculated from the Miscellaneous entries on the employee s time card 137 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Pending Left Count Details Definition Displays the number of hours of the benefit the employee will take in the future within the current pay period Displays the number of hours left This is calculated by subtracting the Taken and Pending amounts from the Allowed as follows Left Given Taken Pending Displays the number of individual days on which the benefit time was taken or is pending Click this button to display the individual entitlement transactions for this employee Benefit Entitlement Employee Benefit Details 1 Navigate to the Benefits tab of the Configure Employee window 2 Highlight the benefit Category you wish to view 3 Click the Details button The Benefit Details screen for the selected Category will open Benefit Details for AC Amou
289. tenance 2 Fill in the settings as appropriate Setting Backup File Name Definition Enter the name you wish to use to refer to this backup file A good practice is use the date of the backup as the file name Backup To Select the destination drive for the file The options are Drive A Typically a floppy drive Drive B Typically a floppy drive Other Can be the local hard drive or any network drive January 2009 Time America Inc 263 TA100 Pro Manual Destination Enter the destination drive letter and directory for the backup file Compression Select the Compression method for the Method backup data The options are Maximum Saves as much disk space as possible but takes longer Fast Compresses quickly with high data integrity and is the default option Store Only Does not compress data but stores it all in one file Format If Drive A or B are selected these settings will become available TA100 Pro will format the floppy drive prior to copying the backup file onto it Choose the method of formatting desired The options are Quick Deletes all information on the drive without formatting Conditional Saves the table that is on the disk Unconditional Deletes everything on the disk and reformats Low Density Formats a low density disk which almost never heard of anymore and should only be used by knowledgeable users 3 Click OK to begin the backup System Restore S
290. tes on file for badge numbers 1 Retrieve templates from All Clocks Add Figure 127 Configure Employee Clocks tab Settin Clock ID Badge Verification Authority Templates on file for Badge Numbers Retrieve Templates From All Clocks Add Edit Delete January 2009 Time America Inc Definition Displays the Clock ID assigned to each clock Displays employee badge number Displays the verification level which defines the false read threshold Displays the Authority Level which defines the clock menus employees can view or use at the clock The following options are available Employee Supervisor or Configuration Displays if the employee has a fingerprint template saved Enter the specific clock for individual employee fingerprint template retrieval This opens the All Clocks dialog box Here you can assign an employee to all TA7000 clocks Click this button to select TA7000 clocks individually Edit the settings assigned to the employee Delete the employee hand reader assignment 154 TA100 Pro Manual Employee Details Tab The Details tab manages the employee s personnel settings New employees are also added from this tab Configure Employee Details 1 Navigate to the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee page 119 2 Click the Details tab to display the following information Configure Employee 00003 Anderson Frank Active A Baines Pete
291. the Report Parameter dialog boxes For ease of use the technique is described here and referenced in the instructions below There are four ways to select employees Individually Globally by Group and by Division E gt Add Add all vs v 5 Available 0 Selected Group Division Figure 147 Selecting Employees Select Employees Individually 1 Select the Employee you wish to choose 2 Click the Add button The employee will appear in the Selected list on the right Select Employees Globally 1 Click the Add All button All employees will appear in the Selected list on the right Select Employees by Group 1 Click the Group button The Group Selection dialog box will open O January 2009 Time America Inc 178 TA100 Pro Manual Group Selection SELECT OK Cancel Figure 148 Group Selection 2 Use the drop down to select in the From box to select the first Group you wish to choose 3 Use the drop down to select in the To box to select the first Group you wish to choose TIP To choose a single group select the same Group in both boxes 4 Click OK to accept the changes and return to the dialog box All employees in the selected Groups will appear in the Selected list on the right Select Employees by Division 1 Click the Division button The Division Selection dialog box will open Division Selection SELECT From E To OK Cancel Figure 149 Division S
292. the effective date 4 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Status screen The new Status will be added to the list January 2009 Time America Inc 135 TA100 Pro Manual Edit Employee Status If you choose to edit the Employee s Status the changes will be retroactive to the effective date of the original status entry Because of this when an employee changes Status it is recommended that you add a new Status entry rather than editing the existing Status This enables you to keep a history of Status changes throughout the employee s work history 1 Navigate to the Status tab of the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee Status page 134 Highlight the Status entry you wish to edit Click the Edit button The Status Maintenance screen will become available for you to edit 4 Edit the settings as described in the Add Employee Status section Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Status screen Delete Employee Status You may wish to delete a Status entry that has been added in error One Status entry must always exist thus you will not be able to delete if there is only one Status entry 1 Navigate to the Status tab of the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee Status page 134 Highlight the Status you wish to delete Click the Delete button You will be prompted xi 2 Are you sure you want to delete Figure 106 Deletion Confirmation 4 Click OK to confirm the
293. the next two sections 1 Navigate to the Transactions tab of the Configure Employee dialog box and select the employee whose time you wish to edit See Employee Transactions page 133 2 Navigate to and select the transaction you wish to edit 3 Click the Edit button The Transaction Detail dialog box will open Transaction Detail for 00001 Washington Carol Date and Time i ey awe Function 3 09 19 2005 07 06 11 MON j EZ 000 Clock 001 Override Round Override Automatic Lunches and Breaks ADDING TRANSACTION C ox cma Figure 137 Edit Transaction emo TASZOL v 4 Fill in the settings as described in the Add Transaction section 5 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Transactions screen Edit Add Start Edit Add Start is available from the Online Timecard The Edit Add Start button opens the Transaction Detail dialog box and automatically fills in certain fields e The Date fills in with the date selected in the Timecard O January 2009 Time America Inc 166 TA100 Pro Manual e The Time fills in with the employee s scheduled Clock In time for the selected date e The Function fills in with Clocked In This option is easiest when you are adding a Clock In for the day that matches or is close to the employee s scheduled In time 1 Navigate to the Online Timecard for the employee you wish to edit See Online Timecard page 160 2 Click the Edit Add Start button The Transactio
294. ting the schedule assignment are the same As part of this process you will select a Shift Department Job Step Operation and Task as appropriate for the employee January 2009 Time America Inc 126 TA100 Pro Manual Configure Employee Schedules page 125 the right side of the screen 3 00001 Washington Carol Active Division ALL Group ALL 00002 Baines Peter 00003 Anderson Frank 00004 Jones David 00005 Smith John Edit Entire Week Shift area 6 Listed Number O Name V Show Inactives v v Next gt gt Timecard Schedule Transactions Status Benefits Messages Wages Badges Detail 2004 Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday December 26 27 28 29 30 3 7l 0700 1500 0001 NONE 8 00 00 00 00 00 30 31 0700 1500 0001 NONE 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0700 1500 0700 1500 0700 1500 0700 1500 0700 1500 0700 1500 0700 1500 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 0001 ONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE ork Y Work 8 00 Work 8 00 v Work 8 00 v work 8 00 Iv Work 8 00 Work 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 9 11 15 0700 1500 0700 0700 1500 0 0700 1500 0001 NONE NONE Use as a template Update Back 3 2002 F ri Note The system will automatically update schedules
295. tion Defines the user s access rights to the Transactions tab of the Configure Employee section The options are View Add Edit and or Delete and will allow the user access to employee transaction punch data For more information on this feature see Employee Transactions page 133 Defines the user s access rights to the Status tab of the Configure Employee section The options are View Add Edit and or Delete For more information on this feature see Employee Status page 134 Defines the user s access rights to the Benefits tab of the Configure Employee section The options are View and Edit and allow the user access to the employee s benefits entitlement information For more information on this feature see Employee Benefits page 137 Defines the user s access rights to the Messages tab of the Configure Employee section The options are View Add Edit and or Delete For more information on this feature see Employee Messages page 144 Defines the user s access rights to the Wages tab of the Configure Employee section The options are View and Edit and will allow the user access to employee pay rate information For more information on this feature see Employee Wages page 146 91 TA100 Pro Manual Badges Clocks Status Board Task Organizer Global Benefits Accruals Defines the user s access rights to the Badges tab of the Configure Employee section The options are View Add Edit an
296. to choose today s date Check this box to include hours forecasted from schedule not worked yet on the reports Check this box to reprocess punch information prior to running the report NOTE This significantly slows down the running of the report and is unnecessary if you already have AutoProcessing turned on Select which type of employees you wish to be included on the report Active The report will print only Active employees Inactive The report will print only Inactive employees Both The report will print both Active and Inactive employees 190 TA100 Pro Manual 7 Select the employee s for whom you wish to run the report There are four ways to select employees Individually Globally by Group and by Division Select Employees In Reports Select Employees Individually e Double click the Employee you wish to choose The Employee will be added to the Selected list on the right Select Employees Globally e Click the Add All button All employees will appear in the Selected list on the right Select Employees by Group e Click the Group button The Group Selection dialog box will open Group Selection SELECT From EEP Time America Inc Prob To 001 Time America Inc Pre y OK Cancel Figure 161 Group Selection Use the drop down to select in the From box to select the first Group you wish to choose Use the drop down to select in the To box to select the first G
297. to print from the preview Printer The report will be sent directly to the printer File The report will be sent to a FoxPro report file Email The report will be sent via email See Emailing a Report page 195 Options Select which Audit Trail items you wish to print along with the Transaction details Deleted The report will display deleted entries Changed The report will display the editing history of the transaction Supervisor The report will display transactions edited by supervisors at the clock Employees Select which employees for whom you wish to print Transactions Add Adds the selected employee to the list of employees for the report Add All Adds all employees to the list of employees for the report Remove Removes the selected employee from the list of employees for the report Remove All Removes all employees from the list of employees for the report Click OK to commit the changes and run the report After previewing and or printing close the report if necessary NOTE The transaction report is color coded with red representing deleted items and blue representing changes 8 Click the Close button to exit the Report Settings dialog box and return to the Transactions screen Approval Editor The Approval Editor is an extremely useful tool that displays employee transactions that need approval or editing by a supervisor These items display in the Approval Editor by default e
298. tomatically created a Holiday entry This entry will display in black Displays the date of the entry Displays a three character code for the day of the week of the entry Displays the category associated with the entry i e Work Lunch Break Vacation Sick Absent etc Displays the start time of the entry i e the time at which the employee clocked in for the day started lunch etc Displays the stop time of the entry i e the time at which the employee clocked out for the day ended lunch etc By default this field displays the Department the employee worked in By clicking the Department button in the field header you can choose to display the Job if applicable Each time you click the button it will toggle back and forth between the Department and Job Displays the number of hours at straight time the employee will be paid for this entry This number is calculated using the Start and Stop times adjusted according to the Rounding Lunch and Break policies defined in the Shift Group assigned to this employee 122 TA100 Pro Manual Setting OT1 OT2 OT3 Unpaid Dollars S Auto Processing Approve Unapprove button Show Schedule Forecasting January 2009 Time America Inc Definition Displays the number of hours at OT1 the employee will be paid for this entry if any This number is calculated using the Start and Stop times adjusted according to the Rounding Lunch
299. ts that connect to the newer SD style converters lf you are unsure which you have contact your dealer Ethernet These settings define how an Ethernet clock will communicate with TA100 Pro IP Address Enter the IP address assigned to the Etherlink converter IP Port Displays the port used on the Etherlink Converter The default is 3000 and should not be changed Altering this number will result in communication failure and the possibility of only being able to connect to the Etherlink Converter serially Modem These settings define how a modem clock will communicate with TA100 Pro Baud Rate Select the modem s communication speed Make sure the baud rate selected here matches the baud rate defined at the clock NOTE The maximum baud rate for the TA500 internal modem is 1200 and the maximum baud rate for the TA600 internal modem is 2400 The maximum baud rate for the TA7000 internal modem is TBD January 2009 Time America Inc 200 TA100 Pro Manual Phone Number Start Stop Answer Ring Delay Number of Retries Time Difference Between Computer and Clock Division Supervisor O January 2009 Time America Inc Enter the phone number the PC modem must dial to communicate with this clock The number must be entered in the following format Outside Line Access Code Wait Symbol Area Code Phone Number If no outside line is required such as 9 simply enter the phone number Omit the area code if n
300. ular pay and 12 hours overtime If this option is not checked the employee receives 48 hours regular pay and 4 hours overtime Enter the number of hours in HH MM format to be added to the employee s time for each worked holiday These hours are in addition to actual time worked For example if 8 00 hours are entered in this field and an employee works 8 holiday hours 8 more hours are added to the employee s time The default is 8 00 Click this check box to multiply any worked holiday hours by a specified rate Enter the number of hours in HH MM format added to the employee s time for each non worked holiday This entry is usually equal to the number of regular hours worked The default is 8 00 Enter the minimum number of hours that an employee is guaranteed to receive for holiday pay regardless of the number of hours worked Enter the maximum number of hours that an employee is guaranteed to receive for holiday pay regardless of the number of hours worked 47 TA100 Pro Manual Beginning pay rate if Holiday is worked Beginning pay rate if Holiday is worked Secondary Reset at end of day Select a level to indicate the employee s wage multiplier for a worked holiday Reg Regular wages are paid for a worked holiday OT1 The overtime rate specified in OT1 on the Overtime dialog box is paid for a worked holiday OT2 The overtime rate specified in OT2 on the Overtime dialog box is paid for
301. ults Exports System Fields Employee Length 5 Type Numeric Alphanumeric Department Department Length 4 Type Numeric Alphanumeric Job Job Length 4 Type Numeric Alphanumeric User Defined Fields Field 1 911 Field 2 Field 3 Field 4 Field 5 Field 6 Badges Length 5 Maximum 5 Type Numeric Alphanumeric Automatic Badge Assignment s No Automatic Assignment Next Numeric Available O Same as Employee Number print J _ ok J _ Cancel Figure 27 Main Company Defaults Screen Fill in the settings as appropriate Setting Employee Length Type Definition Enter the term you would like to use to refer to employees i e Employees Associates Members etc The default is Employees Enter the maximum number of digits for the Employee ID Choose the data type for the Employee ID The options are Numeric and Alphanumeric January 2009 Time America Inc 31 TA100 Pro Manual Department Enter the term you would like to use to refer to the business units within your organization i e Departments Business Unit Cost Center etc The default is Department Length Enter the maximum number of digits for the Department ID Type Choose the data type for the Department ID The options are Numeric and Alphanumeric Job Enter the term you would like to use to refer to the second level of job costing in your organization i e Job Project Client etc The default
302. unched in closest to For example an employee that clocks in at 7 45am would be considered to be on the 8am Shift that day simply because he she clocked in closer to 8am than to 7am The parameters for this cut off are defined as part of the Shift You will first create the Shift Group Days Swing Graveyard etc and then will create the unique Shifts within it Configure a Shift Group A Shift Group is made up of individual Shifts that are unique but are related in some way For example the Day Shift Group has Shifts that all take place during daylight hours but has unique starting amp stopping times 7am 4pm 8am 5pm 9am 6pm etc 1 Click the System Setup menu Shifts The Configure Shifts dialog box will open The Configure Shifts dialog box contains three tabs which are described below Configure Shifts 001 Groups Details Differential Standard Shift Code foo ame Standard Shift F T Show Inactives Add Edit Delete Print Close Figure 43 Shifts 2 The Shift Groups tab defines the settings that apply to the Shift Group as a whole and contains the following information January 2009 Time America Inc 56 TA100 Pro Manual Configure Shifts 001 Standard Shift Groups Details Differential Code 00 Name ERE I Active T Flex Open Forecasted hours for floaters 0 0000 Shift Details Start Cutoff Stop 07 30 16 00 17 00 18 00 Gross Lunch Tot
303. up NOTE These rules apply to the entire group and not to the individual shifts Click this button to Add or Edit the Break Rounding Rules 58 TA100 Pro Manual Code 1 Name IN OUT STANDARD ROUNDING Start Stop Round IN punches forward to 15 Dock OUT punches back prior 15 the scheduled start time to the scheduled stop time Grace IN punches back to the 2 Grace OUT punches scheduled start time forwardto the scheduled stop Dock IN punches forward past 5 Rownd OUT punches back 39 the scheduled start time to the scheduled stop time 07 45 cs 09 08 02 08 05 16 45 1658 17 00 17 30 ane eee ees OUTSIDE ROUND Start r Stop Round IN punches outside the above Round OUT punches outside the above rounding parameters to every 15 gt founding parameters to every jis with a 7 minute split with a 7 minute split 10 00 10 08 00 10 15 19 00 19 08 00 19 15 OK Cancel Figure 45 Shift Rounding 3 The Add Edit Rounding buttons are only available when you are adding or editing a Shift Group When you click on the Rounding buttons the Rounding Details dialog boxes contain the following information Setting Definition Code This field is required Enter a unique rounding code up to 5 characters in length Once saved this code cannot be changed Name This field is required Type the time rounding code name as you want it to appear in the system and on reports The rounding
304. ure the baud rate selected here matches the baud rate defined at the clock Enter the phone number the PC modem must dial to communicate with this clock The number must be entered in the following format Outside Line Access Code Wait Symbol Area Code Phone Number If no outside line is required such as 9 simply enter the phone number Omit the area code if not applicable On most modems the wait symbol is a comma typically representing a one second pause Multiple wait symbols can be used if necessary These fields control the time of day the clock s internal modem will answer an incoming call Enter the modem s start and stop answer time in military format HH MM For example to set the modem to answer only between 7 00 A M and 6 00 P M enter 07 00 and 18 00 in the fields provided The default is 00 00 midnight and 23 59 one minute before midnight In other words the modem will answer any time it is called during the day Enter the number of rings that the clock should wait before picking up the line For example setting the Ring Delay to 4 means that after the clock detects a ringing phone it will wait 4 rings before answering 0 means DO NOT ANSWER Enter the number of times the computer should attempt to connect to the clock if communication either fails or is interrupted during polling Enter the time difference in hours between the computer and time clock Since the computer can set th
305. uvs a ear eE E EAPN EEPE NE rap OEN EENE EPOE ENSA EEA ERE REENE ipae 144 CONBU Ct A A EE E EE sock puts Wow ste te acicate les ido 144 AAA MESS A e eat 145 Edita ANYI Ev A E A A ay pase Ai 146 Delete Mess IS dera ETE 146 AVIARE AONE SE E AA EAT sends dpasenseneaies 146 Configure Employee Wages isinna seipa s aaae re Eae didas 146 Add a Global WagBenioiin asnicar ida dinda picada ansar Neea aaa aaa EES a Eana raais Sre aei 148 Edita Global Wage unid ii td del iia 148 Delete a Global WaB estoica idad dcir decidida a riscos Laa lada do dai idas 149 Add an Employee Level Wag sisiscsteciasssscitioes letecssedesiabitcediassbiicssassnessdessdbeveesaasasseadpes cesnassadesnsosbeastapeasegnaacedeceess 149 Edit an Employee Level Wage ssteissi cide docsesseshagesenseagsatleck cesteosesesucbidendsapaasustia cide an EaD a SiE NEEE Eoas 150 January 2009 Time America Inc v TA100 Pro Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS Cont EMPEOYEE BADGES TAB via a td ia ia ot 150 Configure Employee Badges once rt ide A EEE eta 150 Add a BAAS iii atea io e a E o SE sbus cupadedotbebantbareascaddesbvasssdedecdsseeeeeseasessteodseesass 151 Edita Badge o ia sidote cs tetaden sdosodeeeseds eas postsers dossdedecesseuus PEE Se EaR SSe REE REER Sea Taaa 152 Delete a Badge tai e dada iea aerei aeaa Sab bicis 152 EMPLOYEE CLOCKS TAB oococcconononononononononananananananana rara na rara r rra 152 Configure Hand Readers tia aaa io ad aaa ibid 152 Configure TATOO cooncotanins ce
306. visor questions Error messages Messages Enter Function Invalid Source Invalid Badge Invalid Level Enter the length of time from 0 1 to 99 9 seconds the clock will wait for a response to a supervisor question before returning to an idle state Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a second For example 30 0 means that the clock will wait 30 seconds for a supervisor s response to a question such as Employee Badge The default is 90 0 seconds Enter the length of time from 0 1 to 99 9 seconds the clock will display any error message before returning to an idle state Time is entered in seconds and tenths of a second For example 1 0 means that the clock will display error messages for one second The default is 1 5 seconds These settings define the text prompts for certain operations at the clock This field allows you to replace the default ENTER FUNCTION message with a custom message up to 16 characters in length This message is displayed after swiping a badge or entering a badge number at the clock This field allows you to replace the standard INVALID SOURCE message with a custom message up to 16 characters in length This message will display when an input source is used that the terminal has been programmed to ignore For example the employee uses a magnetic strip badge to punch In when only keypad entry is recognized This field allows you to replace the standard INVALID BADGE
307. when the consecutive days criteria is met Check this box to pay a second Overtime Level if an employee works more than the specified amount in the After field TA100 Pro will apply the settings in the After and Overtime Level fields once the employee qualifies for consecutive day overtime Enter the number of hours after which the second OT level will apply on days qualifying for consecutive day overtime For example if the employee gets OT1 for the first eight hours and OT2 after eight hours worked on the seventh consecutive day you would enter 8 in this field and OT2 in the next field Select the second OT level TA100 Pro will pay when an employee meets the qualification for the After field under On days that qualify This setting works in conjunction with the After column and indicates what overtime level will be paid when the number of hours in the After field has been met If checked this option tells TA100 Pro to reset the Consecutive Days count after the Overtime Cycle ends This is used for Pay Periods with more days than the Overtime Cycle 51 TA100 Pro Manual 5 The Differential tab defines the codes and rates for up to three levels of Shift Differentials A Shift Differential is a premium amount or factor paid in addition to the employee s regular wage for certain hours worked during the day Shift Differentials work in conjunction with Shifts The Differential tab contains the following information Con
308. which the employee is assigned Add a Global Wage 1 Navigate to the Wages tab of the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee Wages page 146 Select the Non Exempt option Check the Use Global Wage option Click the Add button to add a new Global Wage The Wage Details dialog box will open Wage Details l Date ERANA FRI Wage 0 0000 OK Cancel Figure 120 Adding Global Wage 5 Enter the date on which this wage takes effect 6 Enter the amount of the hourly wage 7 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Wages screen Edit a Global Wage 1 Navigate to the Wages tab of the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee Wages page 146 Highlight the wage you wish to edit Click the Edit button The Wage Details dialog box will open Enter the amount of the hourly wage O January 2009 Time America Inc 148 TA100 Pro Manual 5 Click OK to commit the changes and return to the Wages screen Delete a Global Wage 1 Navigate to the Wages tab of the Configure Employee window See Configure Employee Wages page 146 Highlight the wage you wish to delete Click the Delete button You will be prompted xi 7 Are you sure you want to delete Figure 121 Deletion Confirmation 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion Add an Employee Level Wage Employee Level Wages specify the wage the employee makes when working for a specific Department Job Step Operatio
309. xit the Configure User dialog box Click the File menu Security User Maintenance The Configure Users dialog box will open Highlight the User you wish to delete from the list Click the Delete button You will be prompted January 2009 Time America Inc 102 TA100 Pro Manual xi C7 4re you sure you want to delete Figure 81 Deletion Confirmation 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion 5 Click Close to exit the Configure Users dialog box January 2009 Time America Inc 103 TA100 Pro Manual Who s Logged In The Who s Logged In screen displays the Login and name of all the users currently logged in to TA100 Pro Refresh button is also available to update the screen 1 Click the File menu Security Who s Logged In The Who s Logged In screen will open You may also print login activity by clicking Print Who s Logged In Login Name Computer Date Time A SYSOP OPERATOR SYSTEM Y 02 27 2009 09 45 00 v Login Activitiy Figure 82 Who s Logged In Change Password The Change Password function changes the password of the user currently logged in 1 Click the File menu Security Change Password The Change Password input box will open Enter your old password Enter your new password Type the password again to confirm it Click OK to confirm the changes and exit the dialog box January 2009 Time America Inc 104 TA100 Pro Manual Benefit Accruals Using Benefit Accruals TA100
310. xtremely useful tool that allows the user to walk through the necessary steps that should be performed for a specific period of time such as Daily Monthly Annual Payroll and System Setup 1 Click the Edit menu Task Organizer The Task Organizer screen will open Annual Tasks Task Organizer Daily Tasks Monthly Tasks Payroll Tasks Daily Tasks The checklist below will walk you through the necessary steps that should be performed on a daily basis Completed Poll Time Clocks J Fix Missing Punches and Absences J System Setup 2 The Task Organizer screen contains the following links e Daily January 2009 Time America Inc 176 TA100 Pro Manual e Monthly e Annual e Payroll e System Setup January 2009 Time America Inc 177 TA100 Pro Manual Chapter IX Global Commands This section describes commands and tasks that can be performed for many employees at once These tasks include Global Message Assignment and Transaction additions 46 TA100 Pro Time America Inc File ME elem Reports System Setup Communications Help a La Approval Editor ed a 22 Employee 3 Status Board Y Task Organizer 7 2 Global Message Assignment Benefit Accruals gt Transactions Figure 146 Global Menu Selecting Employees in Global Operation Dialog Boxes The method of selecting employees is the same in nearly all of the Global Operation as well as
311. y if needed User Name 1 Listed Password Figure 77 Configure Users User tab Setting Definition Login This field is required Enter a unique Login ID for this user up to 9 alphanumeric characters This code will be entered into the User ID field in the login window when this user logs in Once saved the Login name cannot be changed When you press Tab or Enter after entering this field the Password entry dialog box will appear automatically Password This field is required Enter a password up to 9 alphanumeric characters to be used with the User ID above Type the password again to confirm it O January 2009 Time America Inc 98 TA100 Pro Manual Supervisor Badge Active Last First Security Level Startup Start In Color Quality Email SMTP server Display Name E mail Address Outgoing Security User Name Password Enter the badge number assigned to this user For audit purposes this badge number is recorded when this user adds or edits transactions Click the Active check box to indicate that the Login ID is active Uncheck this box if the Login is not being used at this time Enter the last name of this User Enter the first name of this User Select the pre defined Security Level for this user For more information on setting up Security Levels see Configure Security Levels page 87 This section determines the settings that apply when TA100 Pro starts up
312. y the dates shown in the Start and Stop fields TIP Entering O will run the report for the current pay period Enter the number of pay periods in the past for which to run the report Verify the dates shown in the Start and Stop fields TIP Entering O will run the report for the current pay period Click this button to select the Policy that contains the pay period definition you wish to use Displays the number of the selected Policy Displays the pay period frequency weekly biweekly etc Select this option to enter the date range manually The purpose of this field changes depending upon which Date Range option has been chosen If Special is chosen enter the first date you wish to display on the report If Pay Period is chosen this field will display the first date of the selected pay period If Yesterday or Today are chosen this field will display Yesterday or Today s date The purpose of this field changes depending upon which Date Range option has been chosen If Special is chosen enter the last date you wish to display on the report If Pay Period is chosen this field will display the last date of the selected pay period If Yesterday or Today are chosen this field will display Yesterday or Today s date 189 TA100 Pro Manual Yesterday Today Forecasting Reprocess Employees O January 2009 Time America Inc Select this option to choose yesterday s date Select this option
313. ystem Restore restores your TA100 Pro database files from backup When Restoring a Backup all changes made after the backup was performed will be lost If a clock has been polled after the backup was performed the transactions from that polling will have to be reposted 1 Click the File menu Utilities System Restore The System Restore Maintenance dialog box will open aci J Restore Original Date Time F DOS Verify On I Overwrite Existing K Cancel Figure 215 System Restore Maintenance 2 Fill in the settings as appropriate O January 2009 Time America Inc 264 TA100 Pro Manual Setting Definition Select File Click this button to choose the backup from which to restore Restore Original Check this box to change the creation date of Date Time the files being restored to the backup s date and time rather than the current date DOS Verify On Check this box to verify the files checksum between the backup version and the restored version Overwrite Existing Check this box to overwrite existing records with the backup records This should always be checked otherwise you will be prompted to overwrite each table in the database 3 Click OK to begin the restoration process Additional Utilities TA100 Pro provides some nice to have utilities in addition to the System Utilities including e Calculator e Calendar e Conversion Table e System Info e Macros These utilities are found under the Help me
314. ystem Setup menu Holidays The Configure Holidays dialog box will open Highlight the Holiday you wish to delete from the list at the side of the screen Click the Delete button You will be prompted xi 2 Are you sure you want to delete Figure 53 Deletion Confirmation 4 Click OK to confirm the deletion 5 Click Close to exit the Configure Holidays dialog box Groups User defined groups are optional but very useful Groups are used to organize and sort employees throughout TA100 Pro They may be used to sort employees when generating reports and are also used with Security to control which employees managers are allowed to edit Some examples of employee groups are e Managers e Union Employees e Part time Employees Employees are assigned to a group in the Employee Maintenance dialog box Configure Groups 1 Click the System Setup menu Groups The Configure Groups window will open Configure Groups 001 Time America Inc Prot ame Time America Inc Production 2 Listed Code C Name T Show Inactives Add Edit Delete Print Close Figure 54 Configure Groups O January 2009 Time America Inc 72 TA100 Pro Manual 2 The Configure Groups dialog box contains the following information Setting Definition Code This is a required field Enter a unique code up to 10 characters to identify the employee group Once saved this code cannot be changed Name This is a requ

TA100 Pro Manual - 4.01b

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents